HD44780U - SENAI

Transcrição

HD44780U - SENAI

ESCOLA SENAI NAMI JAFET
LUCAS TADEU M. G. F. SALOMÃO
BRAÇO ROBÓTICO MICROCONTROLADO
Mogi das cruzes
2010
ESCOLA SENAI NAMI JAFET
Trabalho de Conclusão de Curso
apresentado ao curso de Técnico em
Eletroeletrônica da Escola Senai Nami
Jafet como parte dos requisitos para a
conclusão do curso.
Profº Orientador: Alexandre Rodrigues de Almeida
Profº Co-Orientador: José Antônio Barros de Oliveira
Mogi das cruzes
2010
Trabalho
de
Conclusão
de
Curso
apresentado ao curso de Técnico em
Eletroeletrônica da Escola Senai Nami Jafet
como parte dos requisitos para a conclusão
do curso.
Aprovado em ____________________________________
BANCA EXAMINADORA
_______________________________________
Profº Carlos Alberto de Farias
_______________________________________
Profº Carlos Ferreira de Souza
_______________________________________
Profº Faustino Hiroshi Nakagawa
_______________________________________
Profº José Álvaro Celidônio Gomes dos Reis
_______________________________________
Profº Ignácio Antônio da Cunha Filho
Dedico este trabalho a Deus acima de tudo que me deu
sabedoria para conduzir esta empreitada e a aos meus pais por
acreditarem em mim e me apoiarem.
AGRADECIMENTOS
Ao Profº Alexandre que me orientou neste projeto e me incentivou a cada dia a
buscar o melhor.
Ao Profº José Antônio que teve paciência de me ensinar e me orientar no ramo
desconhecido que é a mecânica para mim.
Aos alunos Rafael Roberto e Thaynan Nominato pela ajuda na usinagem das peças
mecânicas.
RESUMO
Este trabalho tem como objetivo a construção de um braço robótico que será
controlado através do microcontrolador AT89S52. Através de um display de cristal
líquido (LCD) será mostrada uma pequena apresentação do trabalho e o estado que
o braço robótico se encontra. O protocolo de comunicação serial RS232 foi
implementado ao projeto para a transmissão de uma mensagem ao computador. Os
movimentos do braço robótico serão feitos por motores de corrente contínua,
controlados por drives de acionamento, utilizando o circuito integrado L298. Além
disso, foi instalado na placa de controle um gravador para o microcontrolador. O
programa do microcontrolador foi escrito em Assembly, que é uma linguagem de
baixo nível. O circuito eletrônico foi projetado no ambiente de simulação Proteus,
utilizando o programa ISIS. O projeto mecânico foi desenvolvido com a ajuda do
software Inventor Professional 2008.
Palavra-chave: Braço Robótico, microcontrolador.
ABSTRACT
This paper aims to build a robotic arm that will be controlled through the
microcontroller AT89S52. Through a liquid crystal display (LCD) will be shown a short
presentation of the work and state that the robotic arm is. The RS232 serial
communication protocol was implemented for the project to transmit a message to
the computer. The movements of the robotic arm will be made by DC motors, drivecontrolled drives, using the L298 chip. Furthermore, it was installed in a burner
control board to the microcontroller. The microcontroller program was written in
Assembler, which is a low-level language. The electronic circuit was designed in the
simulation environment Proteus, use it if the ISIS program. The mechanical design
was developed with the help of Inventor Professional 2008 software.
Keyword: Robotic Arm, microcontroller.
SUMÁRIO
1. INTRODUÇÃO ___________________________________________________________13
2. MICROPROCESSADORES ____________________________________________14
2.1 A CPU ____________________________________________________________________15
2.2 DIFERENÇA ENTRE MICROPROCESSADOR E MICROCONTROLADOR __16
2.3 MICROCONTROLADORES 8051 __________________________________________17
2.4 O MICROCONTROLADOR AT89S52 _______________________________________19
2.4.1 PINAGEM DO AT89S52 ____________________________________________________21
2.4.1.1 PORT 0 _________________________________________________________________21
2.4.1.2 PORT 1 _________________________________________________________________22
2.4.1.3 PORT 2 _________________________________________________________________22
2.4.1.4 PORT 3 _________________________________________________________________23
2.4.1.5 RST ____________________________________________________________________24
2.4.1.6 ALE/PROG ______________________________________________________________24
2.4.1.7 PSEN ___________________________________________________________________25
2.4.1.8 EA/VPP _________________________________________________________________25
2.4.1.9 XTAL 1 _________________________________________________________________25
2.4.1.10 XTAL 2 ________________________________________________________________25
2.4.1.11 Vcc ___________________________________________________________________25
2.4.1.12 GND ____________________________________________________________26
2.4.2 ORGANIZAÇÃO DA MEMÓRIA _____________________________________________26
3. DISPLAY LCD ___________________________________________________________28
3.1 PINAGEM DO MÓDULO LCD ______________________________________________29
3.2 INTERFACE COM A CPU __________________________________________________30
3.3 INSTRUÇÕES _____________________________________________________________32
3.4 INICIALIZAÇÃO ___________________________________________________________34
4. COMUNICAÇÃO SERIAL ______________________________________________36
4.1 CANAIS DE COMUNICAÇÃO ______________________________________________37
4.2 A COMUNICAÇÃO SERIAL ________________________________________________37
4.2.1 TAXA DE TRANSFERÊNCIA (BAUD RATE) __________________________________38
4.2.2 TRANSMISSÃO ASSÍNCRONA X TRANSMISSÃO SÍNCRONA _________________39
4.2.3 CHECKSUM E PARIDADE _________________________________________________41
4.3 CARACTERES ASCII _____________________________________________________42
4.3.1 TABELA ASCII ____________________________________________________________43
4.3.1.1 CARACTERES NÃO IMPRIMÍVEIS ________________________________________43
4.3.1.2 CARACTERES IMPRIMÍVEIS _____________________________________________44
4.3.1.3 TABELA ASCII ESTENDIDA ______________________________________________48
4.4 INTERFACE SERIAL RS232 _______________________________________________48
4.4.1 DEFINIÇÃO DE SINAIS ____________________________________________________49
4.4.2 PINAGEM ________________________________________________________________53
4.4.3 CARACTERISTICAS DOS SINAIS ___________________________________________56
4.4.4 TEMPORIZAÇÃO DOS SINAIS ______________________________________________57
4.4.5 CONVERSORES DE NÍVEL TTL – RS232 ____________________________________58
4.4.6 CABO NULL MODEM ______________________________________________________59
4.4.7 CONTROLE DO FLUXO DE DADOS _________________________________________61
5. O HYPERTERMINAL ___________________________________________________62
5.1 CONFIGURANDO O HYPERTERMINAL PARA A COMUNICAÇÃO COM O
MICROCONTROLADOR ______________________________________________________62
6. O CIRCUITO INTEGRADO L298 ______________________________________66
7. O BRAÇO ROBÓTICO _________________________________________________69
7.1 ESTRUTURA MECÂNICA _________________________________________________69
7.2 CIRCUITO ELETRÔNICO __________________________________________________72
7.2.1 FUNCIONAMENTO ________________________________________________________72
7.2.2 DIAGRAMA ELÉTRICO _______________________________________________73
7.2.2.1 LISTA DE COMPONENTES ELETRÔNICOS ________________________________75
7.2.3 CÓDIGO FONTE __________________________________________________________76
7.2.4 FLUXOGRAMA DE FUNCIONAMENTO ______________________________________83
7.3 GRAVADOR ISP __________________________________________________________86
7.3.1 UTILIZAÇÃO DO SOFTWARE ISP FLASH PROGRAMMER VERSION 3.0a ______87
7.3.2 CABO DE TRANSFERÊNCIA DE DADOS ____________________________________88
8. RESULTADOS __________________________________________________________89
9. CONCLUSÃO ___________________________________________________________90
REFERÊNCIAS ____________________________________________________________91
ANEXOS ____________________________________________________________________92
LISTA DE ILUSTRAÇÕES
Figura 2.1 – Arquitetura básica do Microprocessador
Figura 2.2 – Ilustração da CPU em um ciclo de busca de instrução (na ROM)
Figura 2.3 – Diferença entre um microprocessador e um microcontrolador
Figura 2.4 – Diagrama de blocos do 8048
Figura 2.5 – Diagrama de blocos do 8051
Figura 2.6 – Pinagem do AT89S52
Figura 2.7 – Diagrama de blocos do AT89S52
Figura 2.8 – Estrutura de memórias
Figura 2.9 – RAM interna
Figura 2.10 – Registradores da RAM interna
Figura 3.1 – Circuito de controle de contraste
Figura 3.2 – Ciclo de escrita de memória externa do microcontrolador
Figura 3.3 – Ciclo de escrita do módulo LCD
Figura 3.4 – Ciclo de leitura do módulo LCD
Figura 4.1 – Transmissão a uma taxa de 9600 bps
Figura 4.2 – Canal de dados e de sincronismo
Figura 4.3 – Transmissão assíncrona
Figura 4.4 – Tipos de paridade
Figura 4.5 – Cálculo do checksum
Figura 4.6 – DTE e DCE
Figura 4.7 – Dois DTE interligados através de um modem
Figura 4.8 – Pinagem do conector do DTE
Figura 4.9 – Pinagem do conector do DCE
Figura 4.10 – Sinais mais comuns
Figura 4.11 – Circuito elétrico equivalente do RS232
Figura 4.12 – Sinal típico do RS232
Figura 4.13 – O CI MAX232
Figura 4.14 – Configuração do cabo Null Modem
Figura 5.1 – Inserindo um nome para a conexão
Figura 5.2 – Nome da conexão e ícone escolhido
Figura 5.3 – Escolhendo a porta de comunicação
Figura 5.4 – Configurando a porta de comunicação
Figura 5.5 – Alterando o Controle de Fluxo
Figura 5.6 – HyperTerminal configurado e já conectado à porta COM1
Figura 6.1 - Digrama interno do L298
Figura 6.2 - Pinagem do L298
Figura 6.3 - Controle de motor DC
Figura 6.4 - Conexão em paralelo de duas pontes
Figura 7.1 - Esquematização de forças
Figura 7.2 – Sistema de polias e correia
Figura 7.3 - O Braço Robótico
Figura 7.4 - Unidade Processamento e Drive de Controle dos motores
Figura 7.5 - Tela inicial do programa
Figura 7.6 - Configuração do cabo para gravação
LISTA DE TABELAS
Tabela 2.1 – Funções especiais do PORT 1
Tabela 2.2 - Funções especiais do PORT 3
Tabela 3.1 – LCD disponíveis
Tabela 3.2 – Pinagem do módulo LDC
Tabela 3.3 – Principais instruções dos módulos LCD
Tabela 3.4 – Instruções do controlador e tempo de execução
Tabela 4.1 – Caracteres de Controle
Tabela 4.2 – Caracteres imprimíveis
Tabela 4.3 – Tabela ASCII estendida
Tabela 4.4 – Sinais de referência
Tabela 4.5 – Canal de comunicação primário
Tabela 4.6 – Canal de comunicação secundário
Tabela 4.7 – Sinais de controle e status
Tabela 4.8 – Sinais de transmissão e recepção
Tabela 4.9 – Sinais de teste
Tabela 7.1 – Lista de componentes eletrônicos
LISTA DE ABREVEATURA E SIGLAS
PC
Personal Computer
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
ISP
In-Systen Programming
ROM
Read Only Memory
RAM
Random Access Memory
CPU
Central Processing Unit
I/O
Input / Output
ALU
Arithmetic Logic Unit
EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
TTL
Transistor-Transistor Logic
CRT
Cathode Ray Tube
LED
Light-Emitting Diode
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DCE
Data Circuit-terminating Equipment
BBS
Bulletin Board System
DC
Direct Current
PWM
Pulse-Width Modulation
CI
Circuito Integrado
ABNT
Associação Brasileira de Normas Técnicas
P2
Polia Motora
P3
Polia Movida
Dp
Diâmetro primitivo
EPP
Enhanced Parallel Port
DLL
Dynamic-link library
13
1. INTRODUÇÃO
Atualmente, com o avanço da tecnologia e o aumento da competitividade entre as
indústrias, viu-se necessário a substituição de alguns processos realizados
manualmente. Nesse contexto de que “tempo é dinheiro”, surgiram os primeiros
robôs com a finalidade de realizar as tarefas humanas com maior precisão e
repetibilidade. O braço robótico está presente nas indústrias dos mais variados
segmentos, sejam para a movimentação de peças, até a soldagem de chassis
inteiros de carros.
Este trabalho tem como objetivo a construção de um braço robótico para efeito
didático, controlado por um microcontrolador da família 8051, mais especificamente
o AT89S52 da Atmel. O microcontrolador irá se comunicar com o PC através da
porta serial, utilizando o protocolo RS232. Na tela do computador será mostrada
uma apresentação básica do projeto. Além disso, será mostrado em um display de
LCD o estado do robô. Todo o controle será feito na placa principal, a qual é munida
de um gravador ISP (In-Systen Programming) com a finalidade de realizar a
gravação sem a necessidade de um gravador externo.
14
2. MICROPROCESSADORES
Um microprocessador é um elemento eletrônico, desenvolvido para executar tarefas
específicas, com linguagem de comando específica. Ele utiliza uma Memória de
Programa (Code Memory – ROM) para ler as instruções que deve executar e se
utiliza de uma Memória de Dados (Data Memory – RAM) para armazenar
temporariamente informações de uso próprio das instruções, enquanto essas
informações devem ser armazenadas.
Na figura 2.1, vemos a ilustração simplificada de um microprocessador com CPU
(Central Processing Unit) e seus elementos básicos associados: RAM, ROM,
periféricos e fonte de alimentação.
Figura 2.1 – Arquitetura básica do Microprocessador.
No microprocessador há vias (Bus = Barramento) de controle, endereço, de
comunicação de dados, de controle auxiliar e de entrada e saídas (I/O –
Input/Output).
As vias de controle de endereço servem para a CPU selecionar com qual posição de
memória ou periféricos deseja se comunicar.
As vias de controle auxiliar são sinais auxiliares que permitem ao microprocessador
acionar, por exemplo, em certo tempo, a ROM e não a RAM, e vice-versa. Os dados
15
e endereços trafegam pela mesma via; por isso as vias de controle servem para
escolher um endereço ou ler/escrever um dado no barramento.
As vias de I/O são as vias que permitem a conexão com o mundo externo, a fim de a
CPU trocar informações com ele. Nela pode ser conectado qualquer periférico, como
teclados, displays, lâmpadas, motores entre outros.
A CPU é o cérebro do sistema, e tem a função de comandar todos os barramentos,
de acordo com as informações gravadas na ROM.
O oscilador é o elemento que gera o “marca passo” da CPU, que permite que o
microprocessador realize as tarefas internas e externas de maneira sincronizada e
com velocidade predeterminada.
O reset é o elemento que faz a CPU iniciar suas rotinas internas e realizar também a
primeira leitura de instrução no endereço 0000h.
As interrupções são pinos de acesso externo que permitem interromper o
microprocessador, que então interrompe suas tarefas atuais e atende aquelas
planejadas pela interrupção solicitada.
2.1 A CPU
A seguir, na figura 2.2, vemos o ciclo de leitura de uma instrução na ROM.
Figura 2.2 – Ilustração da CPU em um ciclo de busca de instrução (na ROM).
16
Os registradores são equivalentes a uma RAM, só que interna à CPU. Servem para
armazenamento temporário de informações de utilidade interna ou externa à CPU.
O contador de programa (Program Couter – PC) é o indicador de endereço de
memória. Ele serve para endereçar a próxima instrução a ser lida pelo
microprocessador.
O registrador de instrução (Instruction Register – IR) é o local para onde se dirige o
código da instrução que foi lida na ROM por meio do endereço do PC no ciclo de
busca. O IR é necessário para que se possa mandar a instrução para o
decodificador.
A unidade de decodificação é o local onde a instrução é decodificada, e também são
gerados os controles que, junto com a unidade de controle, permitem executar a
instrução na ALU.
A unidade lógica e aritmética (Arithmetic Logic Unit – ALU) é o local em que são
realizadas as operações de lógica, aritmética e decisão/comparação. É o cérebro da
máquina.
O acumulador (Accumulator) é um registrador principal, e várias instruções se
referem a ele para ele operar.
A unidade de controle (Control Unit) é o local em que se processa o controle de fluxo
das informações a fim de realizar a instrução recebida.
2.2 DIFERENÇA ENTRE MICROPROCESSADOR E
MICROCONTROLADOR
A principal diferença entre um microprocessador e um microcontrolador é o
hardware interno. A maioria das aplicações que utilizam um microprocessador
necessita
de
memória
ROM,
RAM
e
de
chips
auxiliares
como
temporizadores/contadores, interfaces seriais, entre outros. No microcontrolador
esses periféricos já se encontram dentro de um único chip. Veja na figura 2.3 a
diferença entre os dois.
17
Figura 2.3 – Diferença entre um microprocessador e um microcontrolador.
2.3 MICROCONTROLADORES 8051
A família 8051 originou-se a partir da família 8048. Esta foi a primeira família de
controladores lançada no mercado pela INTEL. As limitações tecnológicas da época
(1976) impuseram uma série de restrições, mas, para a época, foi um grande
produto. Uma de suas maiores aplicações foram os teclados dos computadores de
16 bits, IBM PC (lançados em 1981).
18
Figura 2.4 – Diagrama de blocos do 8048.
O 8048 oferece os seguintes recursos:
•
Interrupções (em 1 nível somente),
•
Single Step,
•
1K de ROM interna (8748 tinha uma EPROM de 1K),
•
Memória de Programa Externa de até 4 KB (PC=12 bits com o bit mais
significativo, alterado pela instrução SEL, chaveando os 2 bancos de 2K),
•
Aceita outros periféricos (8155,8255,8355,8243,8279),
•
96 instruções, 90% de 1 byte.
O êxito da família MCS-48 e os avanços da tecnologia dos circuitos integrados
levaram a INTEL a lançar no mercado a família MCS-51 em 1980. O
microcontrolador 8051 é o membro original da família e também o núcleo para toda
a MCS-51.
19
Figura 2.5 – Diagrama de blocos do 8051.
O 8051 oferece os seguintes recursos:
•
5 Interrupções (2 externas, 2 dos timers/counters e 1 da porta serial),
•
64 KB de Memória de Programa (PC=16 bits),
•
64 KB de Memória de Dados,
•
111 Instruções:
o 1 ciclo " 64 " 58%
o 2 ciclos " 45 " 40%
o 4 ciclos " 2 " 2%
o 1 byte " 49 " 44%
o 2 bytes " 46 " 41%
o 3 bytes " 16 " 15%
•
98% de 1 ou 2 ciclos " velocidade
•
85% de 1 ou 2 bytes " compacto
2.4 O MICROCONTROLADOR AT89S52
O microcontrolador AT89S52, da Atmel, pertence à família MCS-51 e é o mais
utilizado por suas características e pelo baixo custo e fácil aquisição no mercado.
Suas principais características são:
20
•
Compatível com a família MCS-51;
•
8K Bytes de memória Flash ISP, com 10.000 ciclos de gravação e
apagamento;
•
Faixa de operação de 4,0V à 5,5V;
•
Operação totalmente estática de 0Hz à 33MHz
•
Proteção de programa em três níveis (Lock Bits)
•
RAM interna de 256 bytes
•
32 estradas/saídas programáveis
•
Três contadores/temporizadores de 16 bits
•
Oito fonts de interrupção
•
Canal serial programável Full Duplex
•
Modo de economia de energia
•
Reseta a CPU através da interrupção de economia de energia
•
Temporizador Watchdog
•
Data Pointer duplo
•
Tempo de programação rápido
•
Programação ISP (bytes e página)
Figura 2.6 – Pinagem do AT89S52.
21
Figura 2.7 – Diagrama de blocos do AT89S52.
2.4.1 PINAGEM DO AT89S52
2.4.1.1 PORT 0
O PORT 0 é uma porta bidirecional de I/O de 8 bits de dreno aberto. Como porta de
saída cada pino pode ser interligado a até oito cargas TTL diretamente. Quando se
encontra em nível lógico 1, os pinos funcionam como entrada em alta impedância.
É também utilizado como via multiplexada da parte baixa dos endereços ou dados,
quando se utiliza memória externa. Nesse modo, P0 possui pull-ups internso.
22
Para utilizá-lo como saída é necessário utilizar resistores de pull-up, garantindo
assim, nível lógico 1.
O PORT 0 também recebe os dados no processo de gravação interna da memória
Flash de programa, e é usado como saída no processo de verificação da gravação.
Pull-ups externos são necessários durante o processo de verificação.
2.4.1.2 PORT 1
O PORT 1 é uma porta bidirecional de I/O de 8 bits com pull-ups internos. Seu buffer
pode suportar até quatro cargas TTL diretamente. Quando se encontra em nível
lógico 1, pode ser utilizado com entrada devido aos resistores de pull-up interno,
podendo ser colocado em nível lógico 0, fornecendo corrente através dos resistores
de pull-up internos.
Em adição, os pinos P0.0 e P0.1 podem ser configurados para entradas externas
para o contador do TIMER2 (P1.0/T2) e como entrada de habilitação externa do
TIMER2 (P1.1/T2EX).
O PORT 1 também recebe a parte baixa dos endereços durante o processo de
gravação/verificação do chip.
Tabela 2.1 – Funções especiais do PORT 1.
2.4.1.3 PORT 2
23
O PORT 2 envia a parte alta dos endereços em operações de busca de instruções
quando o sistema é configurado para utilizar memória de programa externa, e
também quando acessa a memória RAM externa que contenha endereços de 16 bits
(MOVX @DPTR). Nessa aplicação, o PORT 2 usa fortes pull-ups internos quando
seus pinos são levados a nível alto.
Durante o acesso à memória externa que usa endereços de 8 bits (MOVX @RI), P2
reflete o conteúdo do registrador especial de funções interno P2.
O PORT 2 recebe os bits de alta ordem do endereço e vários sinais de controle
durante o processo de gravação/verificação.
2.4.1.4 PORT 3
O
PORT
3
recebe
vários
sinais
de
controle
durante
o
processo
de
gravação/verificação.
O PORT 3 serve também para várias características especiais do AT89S52, como
indica a tabela a seguir.
24
Tabela 2.2 - Funções especiais do PORT 3.
2.4.1.5 RST
Entrada de reset. Nível alto nesse pino por dois ciclos de máquina enquanto o
oscilador estiver funcionando, reseta o sistema, fazendo com que o microcontrolador
reinicie o seu ciclo de busca de instruções na memória de programa localizada no
endereço 0000h.
2.4.1.6 ALE/PROG
Address Latch Enable (ALE). É um pulso de saída para travar a parte baixa do
endereço durante o acesso à memória externa. Esse pino é também opino de
entrada do pulso de programação (PROG) durante a operação de gravação da Flash
interna.
Em operação normal, sem o uso de memória externa, ALE é pulsado em um valor
constante de 1/6 da freqüência do oscilador, e pode ser usado como gerador de
clock externo em alguns casos. Note que somente um pulso é emitido durante o
processo de acesso à memória externa.
Se desejado, a operação do pino ALE pode ser inibida alternado o BIT0 do
registrador AUXR (8EH). Com esse bit em 1 (nível alto) o pino ALE só é ativado
durante operações de escritas/leitura de memória externa (durante as instruções
25
MOVX ou MOVC). Desligando essa função durante o processo de leitura/escrita da
memória externa, não causa nenhum efeito no microcontrolador.
2.4.1.7 PSEN
Program Store Enable (PSEN) é o pulso de habilitação de leitura para memória de
programa externa.
2.4.1.8 EA/VPP
External Access Enable (EA). Habilitação de memória de programa externa.
EA deve ser ligado ao GND quando se utilizam programas gravados em memória
externa. Quando se utilizam programas gravados na memória Flash interna, EA
deve ser conectado ao Vcc.
Esse pino também recebe a tensão de 12V quando se programaa memora Flash
interna.
2.4.1.9 XTAL 1
Pino de entrada inversora do amplificador oscilador interno uo pino de entrada para
o circuito oscilador de clock externo.
2.4.1.10 XTAL 2
Pino de saída inversora do amplificador oscilador interno.
2.4.1.11 Vcc
Pino de alimentação positiva de 5V.
26
2.4.1.12 GND
Pino de alimentação de referência GND.
2.4.2 ORGANIZAÇÃO DA MEMÓRIA
Este microcontrolador tem um espaço separado para memória de programa e para
memória de dados. É possível também, ele gerenciar memória RAM e ROM
externas.
Figura 2.8 – Estrutura de memórias.
27
Figura 2.9 – RAM interna.
Figura 2.10 – Registradores da RAM interna.
28
3. DISPLAY LCD
Os módulos LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) são interfaces de saída muito útil em
sistemas microprocessados. Estes módulos podem ser gráficos e a caracter. Com
ele é possível escrever mensagens de interação com o mundo externo. Os LCD
comuns (tipo caracter) são especificados em número de linhas por colunas e são
encontrados nas configurações previstas na tabela 3.1.
Tabela 3.1 – LCD disponíveis.
Um LCD consiste de um líquido polarizador da luz, eletricamente controlado, que se
encontra
comprimido
dentro
de
celas
entre
duas
lâminas
transparentes
polarizadoras. Os eixos polarizadores das duas lâminas estão alinhados
perpendicularmente entre si. Cada cela é provida de contatos elétricos que permitem
que um campo elétrico possa ser aplicado ao líquido no interior.
Entre as suas principais características está a sua leveza, sua portabilidade, e sua
capacidade de ser produzido em quantidades muito maiores do que os tubos de
raios catódicos (CRT). Seu baixo consumo de energia elétrica lhe permite ser
utilizado em equipamentos portáteis, alimentados por bateria eletrônica. É um
29
dispositivo eletrônico-óptico modulado, composto por um determinado número
de pixels, preenchidos com cristais líquidos e dispostos em frente a uma fonte de luz
para produzir imagens em cores ou preto e branco.
3.1 PINAGEM DO MÓDULO LCD
Os módulos podem ser encontrados com LED backlight (com uma iluminação de
fundo) para facilitar as leituras durante a noite. Neste caso, a alimentação deste led
faz-se normalmente pelos pinos 15 e 16 para os módulos comuns e 19 e 20 para os
módulos gráficos, sendo os pinos 15 e 19 para ligação ao anodo e os pinos 16 e 20
para o catodo. A corrente de alimentação deste led varia de 100 a 200mA,
dependendo do modelo. Estes módulos utilizam um controlador próprio, permitindo
sua interligação com outras placas através de seus pinos, onde deve ser alimentado
o módulo e interligado o barramento de dados e controle do módulo com a placa do
usuário. Naturalmente que além de alimentar e conectar os pinos do módulo com a
placa do usuário deverá haver um protocolo de comunicação entre as partes, que
envolve o envio de bytes de instruções e bytes de dados pelo sistema do usuário.
A tabela 3.2 descreve cada pino do módulo para conexão deste a outra placa.
Tabela 3.2 – Pinagem do módulo LDC.
30
Figura 3.1 – Circuito de controle de contraste.
3.2 INTERFACE COM A CPU
Os módulos LCD são projetados para conectar-se com a maioria das CPU’s
disponíveis no mercado, bastando para isso que esta CPU atenda as temporizações
de leitura e escrita de instruções e dados, fornecido pelo fabricante do módulo. As
figuras a seguir mostram um exemplo de diagrama de tempos típico requeridos para
operação de escrita e leitura no módulo LCD e, o diagrama de tempo do
microcontrolador AT89S52 no ciclo de escrita de memória externa, já que o
microcontrolador pode enxergar os periféricos externos como uma memória externa.
Figura 3.2 – Ciclo de escrita de memória externa do microcontrolador.
31
Figura 3.3 – Ciclo de escrita do módulo LCD.
Figura 3.4 – Ciclo de leitura do módulo LCD.
O módulo LCD pode se comunicar com a CPU com um barramento de 4 ou 8 bits
dependendo das configurações de inicialização do módulo.
32
3.3 INSTRUÇÕES
A seguir segue uma tabela com as principais instruções dos módulos LCD.
Tabela 3.3 – Principais instruções dos módulos LCD.
A tabela a seguir mostra todas as instruções disponíveis e o tempo médio de
execução para os principais módulo LCD existente no mercado.
33
Tabela 3.4 – Instruções do controlador e tempo de execução.
34
3.4 INICIALIZAÇÃO
Para utilizar o módulo LCD deve-se inicializá-lo corretamente, de acordo com os
procedimentos abaixo:
•
Energizar o módulo;
•
Setar o pino Enable, para habilitar o módulo
•
Resetar o pino R/W, para habilitar a escrita
•
Resetar o pino RS, para habilitar o envio de uma instrução.
•
Fixar o modo de utilização, no caso, 2 linhas com via de 8 bits;
•
Permanecer nessa instrução pelo menos por 37µs;
•
Resetar o pino Enable;
•
Setar o pino Enable;
•
Fixar o controle do display, no caso, display acesso sem cursor;
•
•
•
•
Fixar o modo de operação, no caso, deslocando o cursor para a direita;
•
•
•
•
Limpar o display e retornar como cursor para o início;
Permanecer nessa instrução pelo menos por 1,52ms;
•
Resetar o pino Enable.
A partir desses comandos o módulo LCD está pronto para receber os caracteres,
bastando seguir os procedimentos abaixo:
•
•
Setar o pino RS, para habilitar o envio de dados;
•
Escrever os dados do caracter no barramento;
•
Permanecer nessa condição pelo menos por 37µs;
•
•
Resetar o pino RS.
35
Este procedimento deve ser feito para cada caracter que se deseja enviar ao
display.
O tempo de execução mínimo descrito nos procedimentos acima se refere ao
módulo LCD que utiliza o controlador HD44780, da Hitachi.
36
4. COMUNICAÇÃO SERIAL
A distância que um dado sinal percorre em um computador varia de alguns
milímetros, como no caso de conexões de um simples CI, até vários centímetros
quando a conexão de sinais envolve, por exemplo, uma placa mãe com conectores
para diversos circuitos. Para estas distâncias, o dado digital pode ser transmitido
diretamente. Exceto em computadores muito rápidos, os projetistas não se
preocupam com o formato e espessura dos condutores, ou com as características
analógicas dos sinais de transmissão.
Freqüentemente, no entanto, os dados devem ser enviados para fora dos circuitos
que constituem o computador. Nesses casos, as distâncias envolvidas podem ser
enormes. Infelizmente, com o aumento das distâncias entre a fonte e o destino
aumenta também a dificuldade de estabelecer uma transmissão de dados precisa.
Isso é resultado de distorções elétricas dos sinais que trafegam através de
condutores longos, e de ruídos adicionados ao sinal que se propagam através do
meio de transmissão. Embora alguns cuidados devam ser tomados na troca de
dados dentro de um computador, o grande problema ocorre quando dados são
transferidos para dispositivos fora dos circuitos do computador. Nesse caso a
distorção e o ruído podem tornar-se tão severos que a informação é perdida.
A Comunicação de Dados estuda os meios de transmissão de mensagens digitais
para dispositivos externos ao circuito originador da mensagem. Dispositivos
Externos são geralmente circuitos com fonte de alimentação independente dos
circuitos relativos a um computador ou outra fonte de mensagens digitais. Como
regra, a taxa de transmissão máxima permissível de uma mensagem é diretamente
proporcional a potência do sinal, e inversamente proporcional ao ruído. A função de
qualquer sistema de comunicação é fornecer a maior taxa de transmissão possível,
com a menor potência e com o menor ruído possível.
37
4.1 CANAIS DE COMUNICAÇÃO
Um canal de comunicação é um caminho sobre o qual a informação pode trafegar.
Ela pode ser definida por uma linha física (fio) que conecta dispositivos de
comunicação, ou por um rádio, laser, ou outra fonte de energia radiante.
Em comunicação digital, a informação é representada por bits de dados individuais,
que podem ser encapsulados em mensagens de vários bits. Um byte (conjunto de 8
bits) é um exemplo de uma unidade de mensagem que pode trafegar através de um
canal digital de comunicações. Uma coleção de bytes pode ser agrupada em um
“frame” ou outra unidade de mensagem de maior nível. Esses múltiplos níveis de
encapsulamento facilitam o reconhecimento de mensagens e interconexões de
dados complexos.
Um canal no qual a direção de transmissão é inalterada é referido como canal
simplex. Por exemplo, uma estação de rádio é um canal simplex porque ela sempre
transmite o sinal para os ouvintes e nunca é permitida a transmissão inversa.
Um canal half-duplex é um canal físico simples no qual a direção pode ser
revertida. As mensagens podem fluir nas duas direções, mas nunca ao mesmo
tempo. Em uma chamada telefônica, uma parte fala enquanto a outra escuta. Depois
de uma pausa, a outra parte fala e a primeira escuta. Falar simultaneamente resulta
em sons que não podem ser compreendidos.
Um canal full-duplex permite que mensagens sejam trocadas simultaneamente em
ambas as direções. Ele pode ser visto como dois canais simplex, um canal direto e
um canal reverso, conectados nos mesmos pontos.
4.2 A COMUNICAÇÃO SERIAL
A maioria das mensagens digitais são mais longas que alguns poucos bits. Por não
ser prático nem econômico transferir todos os bits de uma mensagem
simultaneamente, a mensagem é quebrada em partes menores e transmitida
seqüencialmente. A transmissão bit-serial converte a mensagem em um bit por vez
através de um canal. Cada bit representa uma parte da mensagem. Os bits
38
individuais são então rearranjados no destino para compor a mensagem original. Em
geral, um canal irá passar apenas um bit por vez. A transmissão bit-serial é
normalmente chamada de transmissão serial, e é o método de comunicação
escolhido por diversos periféricos de computadores.
A transmissão byte-serial converte 8 bits por vez através de 8 canais paralelos.
Embora a taxa de transferência seja 8 vezes mais rápida que na transmissão bit
serial, são necessários 8 canais, e o custo poderá ser maior do que 8 vezes para
transmitir a mensagem. Quando as distâncias são curtas, é factível e econômico
usar canais paralelos como justificativa para as altas taxas de transmissão. A
interface Centronics de impressoras é um caso típico de transmissão byte-serial.
4.2.1 TAXA DE TRANSFERÊNCIA (BAUD RATE)
A taxa de transferência refere-se a velocidade com que os dados são enviados
através de um canal e é medido em transições elétricas por segundo. Na norma
EIA232, ocorre uma transição de sinal por bit, e a taxa de transferência e a taxa de
bit (bit rate) são idênticas. Nesse caso, uma taxa de 9600 bauds corresponde a uma
transferência de 9600 dados por segundo, ou um período de aproximadamente,
104µs (1/9600 s).
Outro conceito é a eficiência do canal de comunicação que é definido como o
número de bits de informação utilizável (dados) enviados através do canal por
segundo. Ele não inclui bits de sincronismo, formatação, e detecção de erro que
podem ser adicionados a informação antes da mensagem ser transmitida, e sempre
será no máximo igual a um.
Figura 4.1 – Transmissão a uma taxa de 9600 bps.
39
4.2.2 TRANSMISSÃO ASSÍNCRONA X TRANSMISSÃO SÍNCRONA
Geralmente, dados serializados não são enviados de maneira uniforme através de
um canal. Ao invés disso, pacotes com informação regulares são enviados seguidos
de uma pausa. Os pacotes de dados binários são enviados dessa maneira,
possivelmente com comprimentos de pausa variável entre pacotes, até que a
mensagem tenha sido totalmente transmitida. O circuito receptor dos dados deve
saber o momento apropriado para ler os bits individuais desse canal, saber
exatamente quando um pacote começa e quanto tempo decorre entre bits. Quando
essa temporização for conhecida, o receptor é dito estar sincronizado com o
transmissor, e a transferência de dados precisa torna-se possível. Falhas na
manutenção do sincronismo durante a transmissão irão causar a corrupção ou perda
de dados.
Duas técnicas básicas são empregadas para garantir a sincronização correta. Em
sistemas síncronos, canais separados são usados para transmitir dados e
informação de tempo. O canal de temporização transmite pulsos de clock para o
receptor. Através da recepção de um pulso de clock, o receptor lê o canal de dado e
armazena o valor do bit encontrado naquele momento. O canal de dados não é lido
novamente até que o próximo pulso de clock chegue. Como o transmissor é
responsável pelos pulsos de dados e de temporização, o receptor irá ler o canal de
dados apenas quando comandado pelo transmissor, e portanto a sincronização é
garantida.
Figura 4.2 – Canal de dados e de sincronismo.
Existem técnicas que compõem o sinal de clock e de dados em um único canal. Isso
é usual quando transmissões síncronas são enviadas através de um modem. Dois
métodos no qual os sinais de dados contêm informação de tempo são: codificação
NRZ (Non-Return-to-Zero) e a codificação Manchester.
40
Em sistemas assíncronos, a informação trafega por um canal único. O transmissor e
o receptor devem ser configurados antecipadamente para que a comunicação se
estabeleça a contento. Um oscilador preciso no receptor irá gerar um sinal de clock
interno que é igual (ou muito próximo) ao do transmissor. Para o protocolo serial
mais comum, os dados são enviados em pequenos pacotes de 10 ou 11 bits, dos
quais 8 constituem a mensagem. Quando o canal está em repouso, o sinal
correspondente no canal tem um nível lógico ‘1’. Um pacote de dados sempre
começa com um nível lógico ‘0’ (start bit) para sinalizar ao receptor que uma
transmissão foi iniciada. O “start bit” inicializa um temporizador interno no receptor
avisando que a transmissão começou e que serão necessários pulsos de clock.
Seguido do start bit, 8 bits de dados de mensagem são enviados na taxa de
transmissão especificada. O pacote é concluído com os bits de paridade e de parada
(“stop bit”).
Figura 4.3 – Transmissão assíncrona.
O comprimento do pacote de dados é pequeno em sistemas assíncronos para
minimizar o risco do oscilador do transmissor e do receptor variar. Quando
osciladores a cristal são utilizados, a sincronização pode ser garantida sobre os 11
bits de período. A cada novo pacote enviado, o “start bit” reseta a sincronização,
portanto a pausa entre pacotes pode ser longa.
41
4.2.3 CHECKSUM E PARIDADE
Ruídos e distúrbios elétricos momentâneos podem causar mudanças nos dados
quando estão trafegando pelos canais de comunicação. Se o receptor falhar ao
detectar isso, a mensagem recebida será incorreta, resultando em conseqüências
possivelmente sérias. Como uma primeira linha de defesa contra erros de dados,
eles devem ser detectados. Se um erro pode ser sinalizado, pode ser possível pedir
que o pacote com erro seja reenviado, ou no mínimo prevenir que os dados sejam
tomados como corretos. Se uma redundância na informação for enviada, 1 ou 2 bits
de erros podem ser corrigidos pelo hardware no receptor antes que o dado chegue
ao seu destino.
O bit de paridade é adicionado ao pacote de dados com o propósito de detecção de
erro. Na convenção de paridade-par (“even-parity”), o valor do bit de paridade é
escolhido de tal forma que o número total de dígitos ‘1’ dos dados adicionado ao bit
de paridade do pacote seja sempre um número par. Na recepção do pacote, a
paridade do dado precisa ser recomputada pelo hardware local e comparada com o
bit de paridade recebido com os dados. Se qualquer bit mudar de estado, a paridade
não irá coincidir, e um erro será detectado. Se um número para de bits for trocado, a
paridade coincidirá e o dado com erro será validado. Contudo, uma análise
estatística dos erros de comunicação de dados tem mostrado que um erro com bit
simples é muito mais provável que erros em múltiplos bits na presença de ruído
randômico. Portanto, a paridade é um método confiável de detecção de erro.
Figura 4.4 – Tipos de paridade.
Outro método de detecção de erro envolve o cálculo de um “checksum” quando
mensagens com mais de um byte são transmitidas pelo canal de comunicação.
Nesse caso, os pacotes que constituem uma mensagem são adicionados
42
aritmeticamente. Um número de checksum é adicionado a seqüência do pacote de
dados de tal forma que a soma dos dados mais o checksum é zero.
Quando recebido, os dados devem ser adicionados pelo processador local. Se a
soma do pacote der resultado diferente de zero, ocorreu um erro. Na ocorrência de
erros é improvável (mas não impossível) que qualquer corrupção de dados resultem
em checksum igual a zero.
Figura 4.5 – Cálculo do checksum.
Podem ocorrer erros que não sejam apenas detectados, mas também sejam
corrigidos se código adicional for adicionado a seqüência de dados do pacote. A
correção de erros em uma transmissão, contudo, abaixa a eficiência do canal, e o
resultado é uma queda na transmissão.
4.3 CARACTERES ASCII
ASCII (acrônimo para American Standard Code for Information Interchange, que em
português significa "Código Padrão Americano para o Intercâmbio de Informação") é
uma codificação de caracteres de oito bits baseada no alfabeto inglês. Os códigos
ASCII representam texto em computadores, equipamentos de comunicação, entre
outros dispositivos que trabalham com texto. Desenvolvida a partir de 1960, grande
parte das codificações de caracteres modernas a herdaram como base.
43
A codificação define 128 caracteres, preenchendo completamente os sete bits
disponíveis.
Desses,
33
não
são
imprimíveis,
como caracteres
de
controle atualmente não utilizáveis para edição de texto porem amplamente utilizado
em dispositivos de comunicação, que afetam o processamento do texto. Exceto pelo
caractere de espaço, o restante é composto por caracteres imprimíveis. Existe uma
tabela entendida para 8 bits que inclui os caracteres acentuados.
4.3.1 TABELA ASCII
4.3.1.1 CARACTERES NÃO IMPRIMÍVEIS
Representados como a parte não imprimível da tabela ASCII, os caracteres de
controle tiveram sua origem nos primórdios da computação, quando se usavam
máquinas teletipo e fitas de papel perfurado.
Caracter Decimal Hexadecimal
Binário
Comentário
NUL
00
00
0000 0000 Caracter Nulo
SOH
01
01
0000 0001 Começo de cabeçalho de transmissão
STX
02
02
0000 0010 Começo de texto
ETX
03
03
0000 0011 Fim de texto
EOT
04
04
0000 0100 Fim de transmissão
ENQ
05
05
0000 0101 Interroga
ACK
06
06
0000 0110 Confirmação
BEL
07
07
0000 0111 Sinal sonoro
BS
08
08
0000 0100 Volta um caracter
HT
09
09
0000 1001 Tabulação Horizontal
LF
10
0A
0000 1010 Próxima linha
VT
11
0B
0000 1011 Tabulação Vertical
FF
12
0C
0000 1100 Próxima Página
CR
13
0D
0000 1101 Início da Linha
SO
14
0E
0000 1110 Shift-out
SI
15
0F
0000 1111 Shift-in
DLE
16
10
0001 0000 Data link escape
D1
17
11
0001 0001 Controle de dispositivo
44
D2
18
12
D3
19
13
D4
20
14
NAK
21
15
0001 0101 Negativa de Confirmação
SYN
22
16
0001 0110 Synchronous idle
ETB
23
17
0001 0111 Fim de transmissão de bloco
CAN
24
18
0001 1000 Cancela
EM
25
19
0001 1001 Fim de meio de transmissão
SUB
26
1A
0001 1010 Substitui
ESC
27
1B
0001 1011 Escape
FS
28
1C
0001 1100 Separador de Arquivo
GS
29
1D
0001 1101 Separador de Grupo
RS
30
1E
0001 1110 Separador de registro
US
31
1F
0001 1111 Separador de Unidade
Tabela 4.1 – Caracteres de Controle.
4.3.1.2 CARACTERES IMPRIMÍVEIS
Caracter
Decimal Hexadecimal
Binário
Espaço
32
20
0010 0000
!
33
21
0010 0001
“
34
22
0010 0010
#
35
23
0010 0011
$
36
24
0010 0100
%
37
25
0010 0101
&
38
26
0010 0110
‘
39
27
0010 0111
(
40
28
0010 1000
)
41
29
0010 1001
*
42
2A
0010 1010
+
43
2B
0010 1011
,
44
2C
0010 1100
45
-
45
2D
0010 1101
.
46
2E
0010 1110
/
47
2F
0010 FFFF
0
48
30
0011 0000
1
49
31
0011 0001
2
50
32
0011 0010
3
51
33
0011 0011
4
52
34
0011 0100
5
53
35
0011 0101
6
54
36
0011 0110
7
55
37
0011 0111
8
56
38
0011 1000
9
57
39
0011 1001
:
58
3A
0011 1010
;
59
3B
0011 1011
<
60
3C
0011 1100
=
61
3D
0011 1101
>
62
3E
0011 1110
?
63
3F
0011 1111
@
64
40
0100 0000
A
65
41
0100 0001
B
66
42
0100 0010
C
67
43
0100 0011
D
68
44
0100 0100
E
69
45
0100 0101
F
70
46
0100 0110
G
71
47
0100 0111
H
72
48
0100 1000
I
73
49
0100 1001
J
74
4A
0100 1010
K
75
4B
0100 1011
L
76
4C
0100 1100
M
77
4D
0100 1101
46
N
78
4E
0100 1110
O
79
4F
0100 1111
P
80
50
0101 0000
Q
81
51
0101 0001
R
82
52
0101 0010
S
83
53
0101 0011
T
84
54
0101 0100
U
85
55
0101 0101
V
86
56
0101 0110
W
87
57
0101 0111
X
88
58
0101 1000
Y
89
59
0101 1001
Z
90
5A
0101 1010
[
91
5B
0101 1011
\
92
5C
0101 1100
]
93
5D
0101 1101
^
94
5E
0101 1110
_
95
5F
0101 1111
`
96
60
0110 0000
a
97
61
0110 0001
b
98
62
0110 0010
c
99
63
0110 0011
d
100
64
0110 0100
e
101
65
0110 0101
f
102
66
0110 0110
g
103
67
0110 0111
h
104
68
0110 1000
i
105
69
0110 1001
j
106
6A
0110 1010
k
107
6B
0110 1011
l
108
6C
0110 1100
m
109
6D
0110 1101
n
110
6E
0110 1110
47
o
111
6F
0110 1111
p
112
70
0111 0000
q
113
71
0111 0001
r
114
72
0111 0010
s
115
73
0111 0011
t
116
74
0111 0100
u
117
75
0111 0101
v
118
76
0111 0110
w
119
77
0111 0111
x
120
78
0111 1000
y
121
79
0111 1001
z
122
7A
0111 1010
{
123
7B
0111 1011
|
124
7C
0111 1100
}
125
7D
0111 1101
~
126
7E
0111 1110
DELETE
127
7F
0111 1111
Tabela 4.2 – Caracteres imprimíveis.
48
4.3.1.3 TABELA ASCII ESTENDIDA
Tabela 4.3 – Tabela ASCII estendida.
4.4 INTERFACE SERIAL RS232
RS é uma abreviação de “Recommended Standard”. Ela relata uma padronização de
uma interface comum para comunicação de dados entre equipamentos, criada no
início dos anos 60, por um comitê conhecido atualmente como “Electronic Industries
Association” (EIA). Naquele tempo, a comunicação de dados compreendia a troca
de dados digitais entre um computador central (mainframe) e terminais de
computador remotos, ou entre dois terminais sem o envolvimento do computador.
Estes dispositivos poderiam ser conectados através de linha telefônica, e
conseqüentemente necessitavam um modem em cada lado para fazer a
49
decodificação dos sinais. Dessas idéias nasceu o padrão RS232. Ele especifica as
tensões, temporizações e funções dos sinais, um protocolo para troca de
informações, e as conexões mecânicas.
A mais de 30 anos desde que essa padronização foi desenvolvida, a EIA publicou
três modificações. A mais recente, EIA232E, foi introduzida em 1991. Ao lado da
mudança de nome de RS232 para EIA232, algumas linhas de sinais foram
renomeadas e várias linhas novas foram definidas.
Embora tenha sofrido poucas alterações, muitos fabricantes adotaram diversas
soluções
mais
simplificadas
que
tornaram
impossível
a
simplificação
da
padronização proposta. As maiores dificuldades encontradas pelos usuários na
utilização da interface RS232 incluem pelo menos um dos seguintes fatores:
•
A ausência ou conexão errada de sinais de controle resultam em estouro do
buffer (“overflow”) ou travamento da comunicação.
•
Função incorreta de comunicação para o cabo em uso resultam em inversão
das linhas de Transmissão e Recepção, bem como a inversão de uma ou
mais linhas de controle (“handshaking”).
4.4.1 DEFINIÇÃO DE SINAIS
Se a norma EIA232 completa for implementada, o equipamento que faz o
processamento dos sinais é chamado DTE (Data Terminal Equipment – usualmente
um computador ou terminal), tem um conector DB25 macho, e utiliza 22 dos 25
pinos disponíveis para sinais ou terra. O equipamento que faz a conexão
(normalmente uma interface com a linha telefônica) é denominado de DCE (Data
Circuit-terminating Equipment – usualmente um modem), tem um conector DB25
fêmea, e utiliza os mesmos 22 pinos disponíveis para sinais e terra. Um cabo de
conexão entre dispositivos DTE e DCE contém ligações em paralelo, não
necessitando mudanças na conexão de pinos. Se todos os dispositivos seguissem
essa norma, todos os cabos seriam idênticos, e não haveria chances de haver
conexões incorretas.
50
Figura 4.6 – DTE e DCE.
Figura 4.7 – Dois DTE interligados através de um modem.
51
Figura 4.8 – Pinagem do conector do DTE.
Os sinais em negritos são os mais comuns.
52
Figura 4.9 – Pinagem do conector do DCE.
Os sinais em negritos são os mais comuns.
53
Diversos sinais são necessários para conexões onde o dispositivo DCE é um
modem, e eles são utilizados apenas quando o protocolo de software os emprega.
Para dispositivos DCE que não são modem, ou quando dois dispositivos DTE são
conectados diretamente, poucos sinais são necessários.
Deve-se notar que nas figuras apresentadas existe um segundo canal que inclui um
conjunto de sinais de controle duplicados. Este canal secundário fornece sinais de
gerenciamento do modem remoto, habilitando a mudança de taxa de transmissão
durante a comunicação, efetuando um pedido de retransmissão se erros de paridade
forem detectados, e outras funções de controle.
Os sinais de temporização de transmissão e recepção são utilizados somente
quando o protocolo de transmissão utilizado for síncrono. Para protocolos
assíncronos, padrão 8 bits, os sinais de temporização externos são desnecessários.
Os nomes dos sinais que implicam em um direção como “Transmit Data” e “Receive
Data”, são nomeados do ponto de vista dos dispositivos DTE. Se a norma EIA232
for seguida a risca, estes sinais terão o mesmo nome e o mesmo número de pino do
lado do DCE. Infelizmente, isto não é feito na prática pela maioria dos engenheiros,
provavelmente porque em alguns casos torna-se difícil definir quem é o DTE e quem
é o DCE. A figura a seguir apresenta a convenção utilizada para os sinais mais
comuns.
Figura 4.10 – Sinais mais comuns.
4.4.2 PINAGEM
As funções dos sinais da norma EIA232 podem ser subdivididos em 6 categorias,
apresentados nas tabelas a seguir.
54
Tabela 4.4 – Sinais de referência.
Tabela 4.5 – Canal de comunicação primário.
Tabela 4.6 – Canal de comunicação secundário.
55
Tabela 4.7 – Sinais de controle e status.
Tabela 4.8 – Sinais de transmissão e recepção.
56
Tabela 4.9 – Sinais de teste.
4.4.3 CARACTERISTICAS DOS SINAIS
Todas as linhas, sejam elas de informações de dados, temporização ou controle,
podem ser representadas pelo mesmo circuito elétrico equivalente da figura a seguir.
Figura 4.11 – Circuito elétrico equivalente do RS232.
Este circuito equivalente aplica-se aos sinais originados tanto no DTE quanto no
DCE. A capacitância “Co” não é especificada na norma, mas deve assumida como
pequena e consistir apenas de elementos parasitas. “Ro” e “Vo” são escolhidos de
forma tal que a corrente de curto-circuito não exceda a 500 mA.
57
Sinais com tensão entre –3 volts e –25 volts com relação ao terra (pino 7) são
considerados nível lógico “1” ( condição marca), e tensões entre +3 volts e +25 volts
são considerados nível lógico “0” (condição espaço). A faixa de tensões entre –3
volts e +3 volts é considerada uma região de transição para o qual o estado do sinal
é indefinido.
Figura 4.12 – Sinal típico do RS232.
Os sinais de saída foram projetados para funcionar em aberto, ou com curto-circuito
com outros sinais do condutor, incluindo o sinal de terra, sem danificar o outro
circuito associado. Os sinais de entrada também foram projetados para aceitar
qualquer tensão entre ±25 volts sem danificar.
Quatro sinais foram implementados com segurança à falhas (“fail-safe design”) no
qual durante a desenergização ou desconexão do cabo, seus sinais estarão
desabilitados (nível lógico “0”). São eles:
•
Sinal RTS – desabilitado
•
Sinal SRTS – desabilitado
•
Sinal DTR – DTE não pronto
•
Sinal DSR – DCE não pronto
4.4.4 TEMPORIZAÇÃO DOS SINAIS
A norma EIA232 especifica uma taxa máxima de transferência de dados de 20.000
bits por segundo (o limite usual é 19200 bps). Baud rates fixos não são fornecidos
58
pela norma. Contudo, os valores comumente usados são 300, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600 e 19200 bps.
Mudanças no estado dos sinais de nível lógico “1” para “0” ou vice-versa devem
seguir diversas características, dadas a seguir:
•
Sinais que entram na zona de transição durante uma mudança de estado
devem atravessar essa região com direção ao estado oposto sem reverter a
direção ou reentrar;
•
Para os sinais de controle, o tempo na zona de transição deve ser menor do
que 1ms;
Para sinais de temporização, o tempo para atravessar a zona de transição deve ser:
•
Menor do que 1 ms para períodos de bits maiores que 25 ms;
•
4% do período de um bit para períodos entre 25 ms e 125 µs;
•
Menor do que 5 µs para períodos menores que 125 µs.
As rampas de subida e de descida de uma transição não devem exceder 30 V/ms.
Taxas maiores do que esta pode induzir sinais em condutores adjacentes de um
cabo.
4.4.5 CONVERSORES DE NÍVEL TTL – RS232
A maioria dos equipamentos digitais utiliza níveis TTL ou CMOS. Portanto, o
primeiro passo para conectar um equipamento digital a uma interface RS232 é
transformar níveis TTL (0 a 5 volts) em RS232 e vice-versa. Isto é feito por
conversores de nível.
Existe uma variedade grande de equipamentos digitais que utilizam o driver 1488
(TTL => RS232) e o receiver 1489 (RS232 => TTL). Estes CIs contém 4 inversores
de um mesmo tipo, sejam drivers ou receivers. O driver necessita duas fontes de
alimentação +7,5 volts a +15 volts e –7,5 volts a –15 volts. Isto é um problema onde
somente uma fonte de +5 volts é utilizada.
Outro CI que está sendo largamente utilizado é o MAX232 (da Maxim). Ele inclui um
circuito de “charge pump” capaz de gerar tensões de +10 volts e –10 volts a partir de
uma fonte de alimentação simples de +5 volts, bastando para isso alguns
capacitores externos, conforme pode-se observar na figura a seguir. Este CI também
59
tem 2 receivers e 2 drivers no mesmo encapsulamento. Nos casos onde serão
implementados somente as linhas de transmissão e de recepção de dados, não
seria necessário 2 chips e fontes de alimentação extras.
Figura 4.13 – O CI MAX232.
4.4.6 CABO NULL MODEM
Um cabo Null Modem é utilizado para conectar dois DTE juntos. Isto é comumente
usado como um meio barato para transferir arquivos entre computadores utilizando
protocolos Zmodem, Xmodem, etc. Ele também pode ser utilizado em diversos
sistemas de desenvolvimento.
60
Na figura abaixo é apresentado um método de conexão de um cabo “null modem”.
Apenas 3 fios são necessários (TxD, RxD e GND). A teoria de operação é
razoavelmente simples. O princípio é fazer o DTE pensar que está falando com um
modem. Qualquer dado transmitido do DTE deve ser recebido no outro extremo e
vice-versa. O sinal de terra (SG) também deve ser conectados ao terra comum dos
dois DTE.
Figura 4.14 – Configuração do cabo Null Modem.
O sinal DTR é conectado com os sinais DSR e CD nos dois extremos. Quando o
sinal DTR for ativado (indicando que o canal de comunicação está aberto),
imediatamente os sinais DSR e CD são ativados. Nessa hora o DTE pensa que o
Modem Virtual ao qual está conectado está pronto e que foi detectada uma
portadora no outro modem. O DTE precisa se preocupar agora com os sinais RTS e
CTS. Como os 2 DTE se comunicam à mesma velocidade, o fluxo de controle não é
necessário e conseqüentemente essas 2 linhas são conectadas juntas em cada
DTE. Quando o computador quer transmitir um dado, ele ativa a linha RTS como
estão conectadas juntas, imediatamente recebe a resposta que o outro DTE está
pronto pela linha CTS.
Note que o sinal RI não está conectado em nenhum extremo. Esta linha é utilizada
apenas para informar ao DTE que existe um sinal de chamada telefônica presente.
Como não existe modem conectado a linha telefônica ela pode permanecer
desconectada.
61
4.4.7 CONTROLE DO FLUXO DE DADOS
Se a conexão entre um DTE e um DCE for diversas vezes mais rápida do que a
velocidade entre os DCE, cedo ou tarde dados transmitidos do DTE serão perdidos,
nesse caso o controle de fluxo de dados é utilizado. O controle de fluxo tem pode ser
feito por hardware ou por software.
O controle do fluxo de dados por software, também conhecido como XON/XOFF
utiliza 2 caracteres ASCII; XON representado pelo caracter ASCII 17 e XOFF
representado pelo caracter ASCII 19. O modem tem normalmente um buffer
pequeno e quando completado envia o caracter XOFF para avisar o DTE parar de
enviar dados. Uma vez que o modem estiver pronto para receber mais dados ele
envia o caracter XON e o DTE enviará mais dados. Este tipo de controle de fluxo
tem a vantagem de não necessitar linhas adicionais, às linhas TxD e RxD. A
desvantagem está no protocolo de comunicação que não poderá utilizar os
caracteres ASCII 17 e 19 em suas mensagens.
O controle do fluxo de dados por hardware, também conhecido como RTS/CTS
utiliza 2 linhas extras em seu cabo serial além das 2 linhas para transmissão de
dados. Quando o DTE quer enviar dados ele ativa a linha RTS. Se o modem tem
espaço para receber esse dado, ele irá responder ativando a linha CTS e o DTE
começará a enviar dados. Se o modem não tem espaço para receber dados ele não
ativa a linha CTS.
62
5. O HYPERTERMINAL
O HyperTerminal é um programa que pode ser
utilizado para conectar um
computador a outros computadores, sites de Telnet, BBSs, serviços on-line e
computadores host, usando um modem, um cabo Null Modem ou uma conexão
Ethernet.
Apesar do uso do HyperTerminal com BBS para acessar informações sobre
computadores remotos constituir uma prática que se tornou menos comum com a
disponibilidade da World Wide Web, o HyperTerminal ainda é uma forma útil de
configurar e testar o modem ou examinar a conexão com outros sites.
O HyperTerminal grava as mensagens que entram ou saem do computador ou do
serviço na outra extremidade da conexão. Portanto, pode servir como uma
ferramenta valiosa para a solução de problemas durante a configuração e uso do
modem. Para certificar-se de que o modem está conectado corretamente ou para
exibir suas configurações, pode-se enviar comandos através do HyperTerminal e
verificar os resultados. O HyperTerminal apresenta funcionalidade de rolagem que
permite exibir um texto recebido que tenha sido rolado para fora da tela.
É possível utilizar o HyperTerminal para transferir grandes arquivos de um
computador para seu computador portátil usando uma porta serial, em vez de passar
pelo processo de configurar o computador portátil em uma rede.
O HyperTerminal pode ser usado para ajudar a depurar código fonte de um terminal
remoto.
Também
é
possível
usá-lo
para
estabelecer
comunicações
com
computadores mais antigos, baseados em caracteres.
O HyperTerminal foi criado para ser uma ferramenta de fácil utilização e não para
substituir outras ferramentas avançadas disponíveis no mercado.
5.1 CONFIGURANDO O HYPERTERMINAL PARA A COMUNICAÇÃO
COM O MICROCONTROLADOR
Para se utilizar o HyperTerminal para a comunicação com o microcontrolador via
porta serial, é necessário configurá-lo.
63
No sistema operacional Windows XP Professional Edition, geralmente o programa
se encontra na pasta no seguinte diretório: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Menu Iniciar\Programas\Acessórios\Comunicações .
Ao executar o programa, será exibida a seguinte tela:
Figura 5.1 – Inserindo um nome para a conexão.
Devemos digitar um nome para a conexão, por exemplo 8051; escolher um ícone e
clicar no botão OK.
Figura 5.2 – Nome da conexão e ícone escolhido.
64
A próxima janela que aparece diz respeito à porta de comunicação que será
utilizada, neste caso deixa-se selecionada a porta COM1 e pressiona-se o botão OK.
Figura 5.3 – Escolhendo a porta de comunicação.
Escolhida a porta de comunicação devemos configurá-la conforme de acordo com a
próxima janela que irá aparecer.
Figura 5.4 – Configurando a porta de comunicação.
65
Nessa janela a única que deve-se alterar é o campo Controle de Fluxo. Deve-se
alterá-lo para Xon / Xoff. Depois basta clicar no botão OK.
Figura 5.5 – Alterando o Controle de Fluxo.
Após configurada a porta COM1, o HyperTerminal está pronto para o uso e já está
conectado à porta, esperando um dado ser recebido. Nesse momento basta
conectar o cabo de comunicação na placa do microcontrolador e no computador,
para ser efetuada a transmissão de dados do microcontrolador para o PC.
Figura 5.6 – HyperTerminal configurado e já conectado à porta COM1.
66
6. O CIRCUITO INTEGRADO L298
O circuito integrado L298 é uma ponte H dupla com transitores, com 15W de
potência, capaz de controlar o acionamento de relés, solenóides, motores de passo
e motores DC, como no caso deste trabalho.
Possui duas entrada de alimentação, uma TTL de 5V necessária para o controle da
lógica interna, e outra de 0 a 50 V para a alimentação da carga.
Com esse CI é possível controlar a velocidade de um motor DC usando o PWM
(Pulse Width Modulation) e o sentido de rotação.
Cada ponte H possui um pino de controle chamado Enable e mais dois pinos,
chamados Input, para o controle da polaridade de saída da ponte, que no caso de
um motor DC (Direct Current) serve para mudar o sentido de rotação.
Além disso é possível monitorar a corrente consumida pela carga através do pino
Sense que serve para colocarmos um resistor shunt e medirmos a tensão sobre ele,
fazendo uma relação entre a tensão e a corrente. Caso não seja usado, deve-se
ligá-lo diretamente à referência negativa do circuito.
Figura 6.1 - Digrama interno do L298.
67
Figura 6.2 - Pinagem do L298.
Figura 6.3 - Controle de motor DC.
Caso o motor usado tenha uma corrente maior que 2A, pode-se conectar as pontes
em paralelo, aumentando assim a corrente total para até 4A.
68
Figura 6.4 - Conexão em paralelo de duas pontes.
Os diodos que se encontram na figura 6.3 são diodos rápidos, ou seja, tem uma
freqüência de chaveamento elevada. Eles são necessários devido à corrente reversa
que surge devido à energização e desernegização de uma carga indutiva. Como a
corrente do motor utilizado é de 200mA, pode-se utilizar o diodo 1N4148, que tem
uma velocidade de chaveamento de 4ns.
69
7. O BRAÇO ROBÓTICO
7.1 ESTRUTURA MECÂNICA
O Braço Robótico do trabalho foi construído a partir de uma estrutura de chapas de
alumínio e os eixos das articulações foram usinados em aço ABNT 1010/1020. O
alumínio foi escolhido para ser utilizado na maioria das peças pois apresenta baixa
densidade e por ser um material resistente à corrosão, além de ser fácil de se
trabalhar devido sua maleabilidade.
Para a transmissão de movimento foi utilizado polias e correias sincronizadas. O uso
de polias foi necessário devido ao baixo torque do motor DC utilizado para fazer a
movimentação do robô, entre 40Ncm e 60 Ncm, e para não haver falhas na
transmissão como por exemplo a correia patinar devido à alta carga, composta
praticamente dos pesos do eixo e motores.
Abaixo segue um diagrama de esquematização das forças para o cálculo do torque
necessário dos motores. Considerou-se o momento mais crítico quando o braço e
antebraço estão totalmente alinhados e paralelos à base e não foi considerado o
peso das chapas, somente dos eixos e do motor do antebraço.
1,715N
1,235N
Mmotor antebraço
Mmotor braço
40
150
1,911N
1,8424N
70
200
Figura 7.1 - Esquematização de forças.
25
70
ç 0,98 150 1,8424 220 1,911 420
1208 120,8
ç 1,911 200 382,2 38,22
Para aumentar o torque dos motores foi utilizado polias de diâmetros diferentes para
aumentar a relação de transmissão. Abaixo segue o cálculo do comprimento da
correia e da relação de transmissão.
P2 = 12XL037 Dp = 19,41mm
P3 = 28XL037 Dp = 45,29mm
45,29
2,34
19,41
Figura 7.2 – Sistema de polias e correia.
Onde:
•
r2 é o raio da polia P2
•
r3 é o raio da polia P3
•
α2 é o ângulo de contato da polia P2
•
α3 é o ângulo de contato da polia P3
•
c é a distancia entre centros
O comprimento da correia vale a soma dos dois trechos retos e dos dois arcos sobre
as polias:
2. . ! "
. #$% $& ' !. #$% ( $& '
2
71
com β em radianos na última parcela.
O ângulo β vale:
! )* +,
$& ( $%
2. Através dos cálculos obtém-se o comprimento da correia a ser utilizada de
244,0289mm. Através da tabela do fabricante encontramos a correia 96XL037 com
243,84mm de comprimento, a qual atende à necessidade.
Todo projeto mecânico foi desenvolvido no software Autodesk Inventor Professional
2008, que oferece um ambiente de simulação do protótipo e de animação. Abaixo
segue uma figura do braço robótico projetado em três dimensões.
Figura 7.3 - O Braço Robótico.
72
7.2 CIRCUITO ELETRÔNICO
O circuito eletrônico foi totalmente projetado em função do microcontrolador
AT89S52. O circuito é constituído pela unidade de processamento, interface de
entrada, interface gráfica de saída, interface de comunicação com o computador e
os drives de controle dos motores. Para a gravação dos programas no
microcontrolador foi inserido na placa de processamento um gravador ISP, conforme
catálogo do fabricante. Foram montadas duas placas: uma da unidade de
processamento e interfaces e outra para os drives de acionamento dos motores DC.
Figura 7.4 - Unidade Processamento e Drive de Controle dos motores.
7.2.1 FUNCIONAMENTO
Quando o sistema for energizado, o microcontrolador enviará uma mensagem pelo
canal serial do computador, que receberá essa mensagem através do programa
HyperTerminal, nativo dos sistemas operacionais baseado no Windows.
73
Após o envio da mensagem, será mostrada no display LCD uma pequena
apresentação do trabalho e em seguida o status do braço robótico: manual ou
automático. Inicialmente ele se encontra em modo manual.
Em modo manual, o microcontrolador fica esperando alguma chave ser acionada
para em seguida ser tomada a decisão de qual motor será acionado e qual o sentido
de rotação deverá ser escolhido. Se desacionado a chave, o braço robótico para de
se movimentar e o microcontrolador fica esperando novamente alguma chave ser
acionada.
Em modo automático, o microcontrolador realizará alguns movimentos prédeterminados via software. Esses movimentos serão realizados até que o
microcontrolador receba um sinal para voltar ao modo manual novamente.
7.2.2 DIAGRAMA ELÉTRICO
O diagrama elétrico do circuito eletrônico foi desenvolvido no ambiente de simulação
e criação de projetos eletrônicos Proteus 7 Professional.
Com o programa ISIS Schematic Capture é possível desenvolver todo o circuito
eletrônico e realizar sua simulação, mesmo com o uso de microcontroladores, como
é o caso deste trabalho, pois ele possui algoritmos precisos de simulação garantindo
os resultados esperados na fase de testes.
A seguir, diagrama elétrico do controlador do braço robótico.
74
75
7.2.2.1 LISTA DE COMPONENTES ELETRÔNICOS
2 Resistores
Quantidade
1
1
2
Referência
R1
R3
Valor
1k
4k7
220R
Descrição
Resistor de filme metálico
Referência
C1,C2
C3
C4
C5,C6,C7,C8
Valor
33p
10u
100n
1u
Descrição
Capacitor eletrolítico polarizado de 16V
Referência
U1,U3
U2
U4
Valor
L298
AT89S52
MAX232
LM7805
Descrição
Ponte H dupla
Microcontrolador
Drive RS232/TTL
Regulador de Tensão
D1-D12
1N4148
1N4007
Diodo de sinal
Diodo retificador
8 Capacitores
Quantidade
2
1
1
4
4 Circuitos Integrados
Quantidade
2
1
1
1
17 Diodos
12
1
26 Diversos
Quantidade
3
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
44
1
1
Referência
Valor
ANTEBRAÇO
12V
BRAÇO
BASE
AUTOMATICO/MANUAL
DMOT1
EMOT1
DMOT2
EMOT2
DMOT3
EMOT3
LCD1
LM016L
RP2
1k
RV1
1k
P1
X1
12MHz
Descrição
Motor DC
Botão Pulsador
Chave alavanca 2 posições
Display de LCD
rede resitiva com 8 resistores
Potenciômetro de carbono
Conector fêmea DB9
Cristal oscilador
Conector macho DB25
Conector KK molex macho 6 vias
Conector KK molex fêmea 6 vias
Terminal para alojamento KK molex
Led difuso vermelho 3mm
Led alto brilho azul 5mm
Tabela 7.1 – Lista de componentes eletrônicos.
76
7.2.3 CÓDIGO FONTE
O programa do microcontrolador foi escrito em Assembly, uma linguagem de baixo
nível. O código fonte foi escrito no próprio ambiente de simulação do software
Proteus. Abaixo segue o código fonte do programa gravado no microcontrolador.
$mod51
;*****************BRAÇO MECÂNICO MICROCONTROLADO******************
;
;
;####################ESCOLA SENAI NAMI JAFET###########################
;
;
;###############TRABALHO DE CONCLUSÃO DE CURSO####################
;
;#################TÉCNICO EM ELETROELETRÔNICA#######################
;
;LUCAS TADEU MONTEIRO GUEDES FERNANDES SALOMÃO
;
;######################PROFESSOR ORIENTADOR######################
;
;ALEXANDRE RODRIGUES DE ALMEIDA
;
;##########################CÓDIGO FONTE##########################
;
;DECLARAÇÃO DAS VARIÁVEIS
FMOT1
RMOT1
FMOT2
RMOT2
FMOT3
RMOT3
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
P1.3
P1.4
P1.5
ENA1
ENB1
ENA2
EQU
EQU
EQU
P3.2
P2.5
P2.4
IN1_1
IN2_1
IN3_1
IN4_1
IN1_2
IN2_2
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
P2.0
P2.1
P2.2
P2.3
P3.4
P3.5
RS
EN
EQU
EQU
P2.6
P2.7
AUTO
EQU
B.0
ORG 00H
JMP MAIN
;ENDEREÇO DA INTERRUPÇÃO RESET
;SALTA PARA A ROTINA PRINCIPAL
ORG 13H
CPL B.0
CALL DELAYAUTO
RETI
;ENDEREÇO DA INTERRUPÇÃO INT1
;COMPLEMENTA O BIT 0 DO REGISTRADOR B
;CHAMA SUBROTINA DE TEMPO
;RETORNO DA INTERRUPÇÃO
DELAYAUTO:
DELAYAUTO1:
MOV R4,#250D
MOV R5,#200D
MOV R6,#5D
DJNZ R4,$
DJNZ R5,DELAYAUTO1
DJNZ R6,DELAYAUTO1
RET
;MOVE PARA R4 O VALOR 250 EM DECIMAL
;DECREMENTA E VERIFICA SE R4 É IGUAL A ZERO, SE NÃO FOR
RETORNA PARA DELAYAUTO1
;IDEM PARA R5
;IDEM PARA R6
;RETORNO DE SUBROTINA
77
MAIN:
ORG 100H
MOV P0,#00H
MOV P1,#0FFH
MOV P2,#00000000B
MOV P3,#00001011B
MOV R0,#00H
MOV R1,#00H
MOV R2,#00H
MOV R3,#00H
MOV R4,#00H
MOV R5,#00H
MOV R6,#00H
MOV R7,#00H
MOV A,#00H
MOV B,#00H
;ENDEREÇO DA MEMÓRIA DE PROGRAMA DE INÍCIO DO PROGRAMA PRINCIPAL
;ZERANDO OS PORTS E REGISTRADORES
MOV IE,#10000100B
SETB PX1
MOV TCON,#04H
;HABILITA A INTERRUPÇÃO INT1
;DEFINE A INTERRUPÇÃO INT1 COMO PRIMEIRA PRIORIDADE
;DEFINE QUE A INTERRUPÇÃO SERÁ ATIVADA POR BORDA DE DESCIDA
CALL INITLCD
;CHAMA ROTINA DE INICIALIZAÇÃODO LCD
CALL CONFIG_SERIAL
CALL APRESENTACAO
JMP RETORNA
;CHAMA ROTINA DE CONFIGURAÇÃO DA INTERFACE SERIAL
;CHAMA ROTINA DE ENVIO DA APRESENTACAO PARA A PORTA SERIAL DO PC
CONFIG_SERIAL: MOV SCON,#40H;
MOV TMOD,#21H;
MOV PCON,#80H;
MOV TH1,#0E6H;
SETB TR1;
SETB TI;
RET
UART COM 8 BITS E BAUD RATE VARIÁVEL
TIMER 1 NO MODO 2, COM AUTO-RELOAD, TIMER
SMOD=0, MULTIPLICA O CLOCK POR 32
CAREGA TH1 COM O VALOR 230, PARA UM BAUD RATE DE 2400
LIGA O TEMPORIZADOR
SETA O FLAG DE INTERRUPÇÃO POR TRANSMISSÃO
APRESENTACAO: MOV DPTR,#MSG4
CALL MSG3
RET
MSG4:
DB ' *****************BRACO ROBOTICO DE 3 EIXOS MICROCONTROLADO******************'
DB 0AH,0DH
;COMANDO PARA MUDAR DE LINHA ESCREVER NO INÍCIO DA LINHA
DB 0AH,0DH
DB '####################ESCOLA SENAI NAMI JAFET###########################'
DB 0AH,0DH
DB 0AH,0DH
DB '###############TRABALHO DE CONCLUSAO DE CURSO####################'
DB 0AH,0DH
DB 0AH,0DH
DB '#################TECNICO EM ELETROELETRONICA#######################'
DB 0AH,0DH
DB 0AH,0DH
DB 'LUCAS TADEU MONTEIRO GUEDES FERNANDES SALOMAO'
DB 0AH,0DH
DB 0AH,0DH
DB '######################PROFESSOR ORIENTADOR######################'
DB 0AH,0DH
DB 0AH,0DH
DB 'ALEXANDRE RODRIGUES DE ALMEIDA'
DB 0AH,0DH
DB 0AH,0DH
DB 00H
MSG3:
CLR A
MOV A,#00H
MOVC A,@A+DPTR
CJNE A,#00H,ENVIA
RET
ENVIA:
LOOP:
MOV SBUF, A
JNB TI, LOOP
CLR TI
INC DPTR
JMP MSG3
RETORNA:
CALL CARREGANDO
CALL DELAY
CALL CLRLCD
;CHAMA SUBROTINA QUE ESCREVE "CARREGANDO" NO DISPLAY
;CHAMA SUBROTINA QUE LIMPA O DISPLAY
78
CALL INTRODUCAO
CALL DELAY
CALL CLRLCD
CALL INTRODUCAO1
;CHAMA ROTINA DAS MENSAGENS DE INTRODUÇÃO DO TRABALHO
;CHAMA SUBROTINA QUE LIMPA O DISPLAY
;CHAMA ROTINA DAS MENSAGENS DE INTRODUÇÃO DO TRABALHO
;######################MODO MANUAL######################
MODOMANUAL:
MANU:
MOV DPTR,#MANU
MOV A,#0C0H
LCALL CMDLCD
LCALL MSG
LJMP MANUAL
DB ' MODO MANUAL '
DB 00H
MANUAL:
MOV P3,#00001010B
ANL P2,#11000000B
MANUAL1:
JNB FMOT1,DMOT1
JNB RMOT1,EMOT1
JNB FMOT2,DMOT2
JNB RMOT2,EMOT2
JNB FMOT3,DMOT3
JNB RMOT3,EMOT3
JB AUTO,AUTOMATICO
JMP MANUAL1
DMOT1: SETB IN1_1
CLR IN2_1
SETB ENA1
JNB FMOT1,DMOT1
CLR ENA1
CLR IN1_1
CLR IN2_1
JMP MANUAL
EMOT1: SETB IN2_1
CLR IN1_1
SETB ENA1
JNB RMOT1,EMOT1
CLR ENA1
CLR IN1_1
CLR IN2_1
JMP MANUAL
DMOT2: SETB IN3_1
CLR IN4_1
SETB ENB1
JNB FMOT2,DMOT2
CLR ENB1
CLR IN3_1
CLR IN4_1
JMP MANUAL
EMOT2: SETB IN4_1
CLR IN3_1
SETB ENB1
JNB RMOT2,EMOT2
CLR ENB1
CLR IN3_1
CLR IN4_1
JMP MANUAL
DMOT3: SETB IN1_2
CLR IN2_2
SETB ENA2
JNB FMOT3,DMOT3
CLR ENA2
CLR IN1_2
CLR IN2_2
JMP MANUAL
;VERIFICANDO QUAL BOTÃO FOI APERTADO
;VERIFICA SE O BIT B.0 É 1, SE FOR PASSA PARA O MODO
;AUTOMÁTICO
;RETORNA PARA A VERIFICAÇÃO
79
EMOT3:
SETB IN2_2
CLR IN1_2
SETB ENA2
JNB RMOT3,EMOT3
CLR ENA2
CLR IN1_2
CLR IN2_2
JMP MANUAL
;#######################################################
;####################MODO AUTOMÁTICO####################
AUTOMATICO:
MOV DPTR,#AUTOM
MOV A,#0C0H
LCALL CMDLCD
LCALL MSG
LJMP INICIO
AUTOM:
DB 'MODO AUTOMATICO'
DB 00H
INICIO:
MOV P3,#00001010B
CALL TEMPO
MOVIMENTO:
CALL DMOT1M
CALL TEMPO
CLR ENA1
JNB AUTO,MODOMANUAL1 ;VERIFICA SE O BIT B.0 É 0, SE FOR PASSA PARA O MODO MANUAL
CALL EMOT2M
CALL TEMPO
CALL DMOT2M
CALL TEMPO
CLR ENB1
JNB AUTO,MODOMANUAL1
CALL EMOT1M
CALL TEMPO
CLR ENA1
CALL DMOT3M
CALL TEMPO
CLR ENA2
CALL EMOT3M
CALL TEMPO
CLR ENA2
JMP MOVIMENTO
MODOMANUAL1: LJMP MODOMANUAL
DMOT1M:
SETB IN1_1
CLR IN2_1
SETB ENA1
RET
EMOT1M:
SETB IN2_1
CLR IN1_1
SETB ENA1
RET
DMOT2M:
SETB IN3_1
CLR IN4_1
SETB ENB1
RET
EMOT2M:
SETB IN4_1
CLR IN3_1
SETB ENB1
RET
80
DMOT3M:
SETB IN1_2
CLR IN2_2
SETB ENA2
RET
EMOT3M:
SETB IN2_2
CLR IN1_2
SETB ENA2
RET
TEMPO:
TEMPO1:
MOV R3,#20D
MOV TMOD,#21H
MOV TH0,#HIGH(65535-50000)
MOV TL0,#LOW(65535-50000)
CLR TF0
SETB TR0
JNB TF0,$
CLR TR0
CLR TF0
DJNZ R3,TEMPO1
RET
;TEMPO DE 1 SEGUNDO
;#######################################################
;#################INICIALIZAÇÃO DO LCD#################
INITLCD:
MOV A,#38H
CALL CMDLCD
MOV A,#38H
CALL CMDLCD
MOV A,#08H
CALL CMDLCD
MOV A,#0CH
CALL CMDLCD
MOV A,#01H
CALL CMDLCD
CALL CLRLCD
RET
DADOLCD:
SETB RS
MOV P0,A
CALL DELAYCLR
CALL HABILITA
RET
CMDLCD:
CLR RS
MOV P0,A
CALL DELAYCLR
CALL HABILITA
RET
CLRLCD:
MOV A,#01H
CLR RS
MOV P0,A
CALL DELAYCLR
CALL HABILITA
RET
HABILITA:
SETB EN
CALL DELAYCLR
CLR EN
RET
DELAYCLR:
MOV R4,#250D
MOV R5,#2D
DJNZ R4,$
DJNZ R5,DELAYCLR1
RET
DELAYCLR1:
;#######################################################
INTRODUCAO1:
MOV DPTR,#ESCOLA
MOV A,#082H
LCALL CMDLCD
LCALL MSG
MOV DPTR,#NAMI
81
MOV A,#0C3H
LCALL CMDLCD
LCALL MSG
CALL DELAY
CALL CLRLCD
MOV DPTR,#BRACO
MOV A,#081H
LCALL CMDLCD
LCALL MSG
RET
ESCOLA:
DB 'ESCOLA SENAI'
DB 00H
NAMI:
DB 'NAMI JAFET'
DB 00H
BRACO:
DB 'Braco Robotico'
DB 00H
MSG:
CLR A
MOV A,#00H
MOVC A,@A+DPTR
CJNE A,#00H,MOSTRA
RET
MOSTRA:
CALL DADOLCD
INC DPTR
JMP MSG
DELAY:
MOV R4,#250H
MOV R5,#200H
MOV R6,#20D
DJNZ R4,$
DJNZ R5,DELAY1
DJNZ R6,DELAY1
RET
DELAY1:
;#######################################################
CARREGANDO:
MOV DPTR,#CARRE
MOV A,#080H
LCALL CMDLCD
LCALL MSG
MOV DPTR,#PONTOS
MOV A,#0C0H
LCALL CMDLCD
LCALL MSG1
RET
CARRE:
DB '---CARREGANDO---'
DB 00H
PONTOS:
DB '>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>'
DB 00H
MSG1:
CLR A
MOV A,#00H
MOVC A,@A+DPTR
CJNE A,#00H,MOSTRA1
RET
MOSTRA1:
CALL DADOLCD1
INC DPTR
JMP MSG1
DADOLCD1:
SETB RS
MOV P0,A
CALL DELAYCLR2
CALL HABILITA2
RET
HABILITA2:
SETB EN
CALL DELAYCLR2
CLR EN
RET
82
DELAYCLR2:
DELAYCLR3:
MOV R4,#00H
MOV R5,#00H
MOV R6,#01H
DJNZ R4,$
DJNZ R5,DELAYCLR3
DJNZ R6,DELAYCLR3
RET
;#######################################################
INTRODUCAO:
MOV DPTR,#TRABALHO
MOV A,#086H
LCALL CMDLCD
LCALL MSG
MOV DPTR,#ELETRO
MOV A,#0C0H
LCALL CMDLCD
LCALL MSG
RET
TRABALHO:
DB 'TCC'
DB 00H
ELETRO:
DB 'ELETROELETRONICA'
DB 00H
;#######################################################
END
83
7.2.4 FLUXOGRAMA DE FUNCIONAMENTO
INÍCIO
DECLARAÇÃO DAS
VARIÁVEIS
0000H
INTERRUPÇÃO RESET
SALTA PARA ENDEREÇO MAIN
0013H
INTERRUPÇÃO INT0
COMPLEMENTA B.0
CHAMA SUBROTINA
DELAYAUTO
SUBROTINA DE TEMPO DE 500mS
MAIN
ZERA AS VARIÁVEIS
E REGISTRADORES
HABILITA INT0
DEFINE COMO ALTA PRIORIDADE
DEFINE DISPARO POR BORDA DE DESCIDA
CHAMA SUBROTINA
INITLCD
CHAMA SUBROTINA
CONFIG_SERIAL
SUBROTINA PARA A
INICIALIZAÇÃO DO DISPLAY LCD
SUBROTINA PARA A
CONFIGURAÇÃO DA INTERFACE SERIAL
CHAMA SUBROTINA
APRESENTACAO
SALTA PARA ENDEREÇO RETORNA
RETORNA
1
SUBROTINA PARA O
ENVIO DE MENSAGEM VIA
INTERFACE SERIAL
84
1
CHAMA SUBROTINA
CARREGANDO
SUBROTINA QUE ESCREVE
CARREGANDO NO DISPLAY
CHAMA SUBROTINA
DELAY
SUBROTINA DE TEMPO DE 1S
SUBROTINA QUE LIMPA O DISPLAY LCD
CHAMA SUBROTINA
CLRLCD
CHAMA SUBROTINA
INTRODUCAO
SUBROTINA QUE ESCREVE A
PRIMEIRA INTRODUÇÃO AO PROJETO
CHAMA SUBROTINA
DELAY
SUBROTINA DE TEMPO DE 1S
CHAMA SUBROTINA
CLRLCD
SUBROTINA QUE LIMPA O DISPLAY LCD
CHAMA SUBROTINA
INTRODUCAO1
SUBROTINA QUE ESCREVE A
SEGUNDA INTRODUÇÃO AO PROJETO
MODOMANUAL
DPTR = DB 'MODO MANUAL', 00H
ACC = C0H
2
85
2
CHAMA SUBROTINA
CMDLCD
CHAMA SUBROTINA
MSG
SALTA PARA O ENDEREÇO MANUAL
MANUAL
P3 = 00001010B
P2 && 11000000B
SALTA PARA O ENDEREÇO MANUAL1
MANUAL1
VERIFICA O BOTÃO APERTADO
SIM
FOI FMOT1?
SALTA PARA O ENDEREÇO
DMOT1
NÃO
SIM
FOI RMOT1?
EMOT1
NÃO
SIM
FOI FMOT2?
DMOT2
NÃO
SIM
FOI RMOT2?
EMOT2
NÃO
SIM
FOI FMOT3?
DMOT3
NÃO
SIM
FOI DMOT3?
NÃO
3
EMOT3
86
3
SIM
FOI AUTO?
AUTOMATICO
NÃO
SALTA PARA O ENDEREÇO MANUAL1
FIM
7.3 GRAVADOR ISP
Para realizar a gravação do programa na memória flash do microcontrolador, foi
incorporado ao circuito eletrônico um gravador ISP (In-Systen Programming) de
acordo com o catálogo do fabricante, no caso a Atmel.
O gravador consiste em um cabo de 6 vias, de preferência blindado para diminuir
ruídos que possam interferir na comunicação, conectado à porta paralela do
computador. A gravação é feita de modo serial, e a porta deve ser configurada para
o modo EPP (Enhanced Parallel Port).
O software utilizado para a gravação no microcontrolador foi o ISP Flash
Programmer Version 3.0a do próprio fabricante do microcontrolador. O software é
compatível em computadores com sistema operacional Windows (98,2000XP), não
necessitando de nenhuma DLL (Dynamic-link library), pois o software já as possui
inclusas.
87
7.3.1 UTILIZAÇÃO DO SOFTWARE ISP FLASH PROGRAMMER VERSION 3.0a
Após a abertura o programa surgirá a seguinte tela, onde selecionaremos o
componente a ser gravado o arquivo hexadecimal que deve ser transferido:
Figura 7.5 - Tela inicial do programa.
A primeira coisa que deve-se fazer é escolher o modelo de microcontrolador que
será utilizado, no caso o AT89S52. Em seguida deve-se fazer a verificação da
autenticidade do microcontrolador, clicando no botão Signature.
Feita a verificação devemos abrir o programa gerado pelo compilador, através do
botão Open File, e ir até ao diretório onde se encontra o programa a ser gravado,
lembrando-se que sua extensão deve ser .hex, que é o tipo de arquivo compatível
com a família de microcontroladores 8051.
Agora o programa está pronto para fazer a gravação no microcontrolador, bastando
apenas clicar no botão Write.
88
7.3.2 CABO DE TRANSFERÊNCIA DE DADOS
A seguir o diagrama do cabo que compõe o gravador ISP.
Figura 7.6 - Configuração do cabo para gravação.
Para melhorar o desempenho do cabo pode-se conectar um buffer para diminuir as
perdas de sinal em função do comprimento do cabo, porém obteve-se um bom
resultado usando 2m de cabo manga blindado de 6 vias, sem a necessidade de um
buffer.
89
8. RESULTADOS
De acordo com as simulações feitas, foi possível identificar erros de hardware e
software na etapa de montagem da placa eletrônica. Todas as simulações
realizadas foram fiéis ao funcionamento final da unidade de processamento e do
drive de controle dos motores.
Em relação à alimentação do circuito eletrônico, observa-se que há a necessidade
de uma alimentação separada para a unidade de processamento e para o drive dos
motores.
Ao decorrer do trabalho, foram testadas várias transmissões de movimento nos
eixos. A que mais foi satisfatória foi a utilização de polias e correias sincronizadas,
pois a correia não patina sobre a polia.
Observou-se também que a resposta do display LCD é maior que a informada no
catálogo do fabricante, permitindo uma escrita mais rápida e sem perdas de dados.
90
9. CONCLUSÃO
Com este trabalho foi possível unir os conhecimentos de mecânica e eletrônica
adquiridos no decorrer do curso.
A construção do braço robótico foi fundamental para reforçar o aprendizado em
sistemas microprocessados, eletrônica digital e eletrônica analógica, além de abrir
caminhos para o estudo de elementos mecânicos utilizados no projeto, como
transmissão de movimentos através de correias.
Conclui-se que os sistemas robotizados atualmente surgiram de simples idéias que
foram se desenvolvendo ao longo dos anos, com o advento da tecnologia. Sem os
microprocessadores e microcontroladores não seria possível o controle de robôs,
máquinas CNC e diversos outros equipamentos que necessitam de um elevado
processamento de dados. A tecnologia foi fundamental para o desenvolvimento
desses equipamentos que fazem parte das indústrias atualmente e sem eles não
seria possível o desenvolvimento econômico de um país, visto que um dos fatores
para se determinar o poder econômico de um país é o grau de tecnologia
desenvolvido.
REFERÊNCIAS
SOUSA, Fernando Simplício. Programação BASIC para microcontroladores
8051:com base na IDE BASCOM-8051. 1ª ed. São Paulo: Érica, 2006.
NICOLOSI, Denys E. C. Microcontrolador 8051 Detalhado. 6ª Ed. São Paulo:
Érica, 2000.
SÁ, Maurício Cardoso de. Programação C para microcontroladores 8051. 1ª Ed.
São Paulo: Érica, 2005.
CANZIAN, Edmur. Mini-curso Comunicação Serial RS232. 1ªed. São Paulo: CNZ
Engenharia e Informática Ltda.
ANEXO A - Desenhos do Braço Robótico
$
%
&
'
/XFDV7DGHX
&KHFNHGE\
/XFDV7DGHX
'DWH
0RQWDJHP
/XFDV7DGHX
$SSURYHGE\
,620
,6
0RWRUGREUDoR
&RUUHLD;/
3ROLD;/
3ROLD;/
(L[RGDEDVH
(L[RGRDQWHEUDoR
(L[RGREUDoR
$60[)ODW
3RLQW
&RUUHLD;/
3ROLD;/
3ROLD;/
,620[
,620[
%UDoR
$QWHEUDoR
0RWRUGRDQWHEUDoR
&610[
'HVLJQHGE\
/LVWDGH0DWHULDLV
3(d$ 48$17,'$'(
120(
%DVH
2PEUR
(L[RGDPmR
,60
,6
0mR
,6
$60
&610[
(GLWLRQ
%UDoR5REyWLFR
'DWH
6KHHW
0[[
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
0RWRU'&99
3DUDIXVRFDEHoDHVIpULFD
0[[
3DUDIXVRFDEHoDFLOtQGULFD
0[[
3RUFD0
$UUXHODGHSUHVVmR0
0RWRU'&99
&RUUHLDGHERUUDFKD
3ROLDGHDOXPtQLR
3ROLDGHDOXPtQLR
$oR$%17
$oR$%17
$oR$%17
3DUDIXVRKDOOHQVHPFDEHoD
FRPSRQWDFKDWD0[[
&RUUHLDGHERUUDFKD
3ROLDGHDOXPtQLR
3ROLDGHDOXPtQLR
0[[
'(6&5,d2
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
$oR$%17
3RUFD0
$UUXHODGHSUHVVmR0
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
$UUXHODGHSUHVVmR0
3RUFD0
3DUDIXVRFDEHoDHVIpULFD
$
%
&
'
$
%
&
'
/XFDV7DGHX
&KHFNHGE\
/XFDV7DGHX
'HVLJQHGE\
48$17,'$'(
3(d$
'DWH
0RQWDJHP
/XFDV7DGHX
$SSURYHGE\
(GLWLRQ
%UDoR5REyWLFR
'DWH
6KHHW
'(6&5,d2
%DVH
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
2PEUR
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
$oR$%17
(L[RGDPmR
,60
3RUFD0
,6
$UUXHODGHSUHVVmR0
0mR
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
,6
$UUXHODGHSUHVVmR0
3RUFD0
$60
&610[ 3DUDIXVRFDEHoDHVIpULFD
0[[
%UDoR
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
$QWHEUDoR
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
0RWRU'&99
0RWRUGRDQWHEUDoR
&610[ 3DUDIXVRFDEHoDHVIpULFD
0[[
,620[
0[[
,620
3RUFD0
,6
$UUXHODGHSUHVVmR0
0RWRU'&99
0RWRUGREUDoR
&RUUHLD;/
&RUUHLDGHERUUDFKD
3ROLD;/
3ROLDGHDOXPtQLR
3ROLD;/
3ROLDGHDOXPtQLR
(L[RGDEDVH
$oR$%17
(L[RGRDQWHEUDoR
$oR$%17
(L[RGREUDoR
$oR$%17
$60[)ODW 3DUDIXVRKDOOHQVHPFDEHoD
3RLQW
FRPSRQWDFKDWD0[[
&RUUHLD;/
&RUUHLDGHERUUDFKD
3ROLD;/
3ROLDGHDOXPtQLR
3ROLD;/
3ROLDGHDOXPtQLR
,620[
0[[
/LVWDGH0DWHULDLV
120(
$
%
&
'
$SSURYHGE\
'DWH
'DWH
6KHHW
&
'
/XFDV7DGHX
/XFDV7DGHX
&KHFNHGE\
'HVLJQHGE\
0RQWDJHP
/XFDV7DGHX
(GLWLRQ
%UDoR5REyWLFR
$
$
$
%
$
%
&
'
$SSURYHGE\
'DWH
%
'DWH
6KHHW
&
'
/XFDV7DGHX
/XFDV7DGHX
&KHFNHGE\
'HVLJQHGE\
0RQWDJHP
/XFDV7DGHX
(GLWLRQ
%UDoR5REyWLFR
$
$
%
%
%
&
'
&KHFNHGE\
/XFDV7DGHX
/XFDV7DGHX
3(d$
%DVH
/XFDV7DGHX
$SSURYHGE\
'DWH
'DWH
(GLWLRQ
6KHHW
'(6&5,d2
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
%UDoR5REyWLFR
/LVWDGH0DWHULDLV
48$17,'$'(
120(
%DVH
'HVLJQHGE\
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
&KHFNHGE\
/XFDV7DGHX
/XFDV7DGHX
48$17,'$'(
'HVLJQHGE\
3(d$
'DWH
2PEUR
/XFDV7DGHX
$SSURYHGE\
/LVWDGH0DWHULDLV
120(
2PEUR
Q
(GLWLRQ
%UDoR5REyWLFR
'DWH
6KHHW
'(6&5,d2
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
5
5
Q
&KHFNHGE\
/XFDV7DGHX
/XFDV7DGHX
3(d$
Q
Q
%UDoR
/XFDV7DGHX
$SSURYHGE\
'DWH
/LVWDGH0DWHULDLV
48$17,'$'(
120(
%UDoR
Q
'HVLJQHGE\
(GLWLRQ
%UDoR5REyWLFR
'DWH
6KHHW
'(6&5,d2
&KDSDGH$OXPtQLR
5
Q53
3
4
/%)
3
Q3
!"
##
$
'
-.,(%
,+'%
3
%
%UDoR5REyWLFR
&!
%& ()*+
!#012
85
Q
5 75
45
5
5
95
5
0'*$
4
5
5
!"#
$%%&
./$-)$'
-,'
Q65
'
%UDoR5REyWLFR
("
'(!)*+,
!"%$123
5
45
Q
.
Q/
.
Q1.
%LR
!""#
%
+,!*&!
*)%
.
%UDoR5REyWLFR
$
$&'()
!!*
.
0.
56
-'!
.
/
Q
%1
4
23 0
0
10
1.0
-'!
.
10
!""#
0
$
$&'()
!!*
%UDoR5REyWLFR
/
Q
%
+,!*&!
*)%
/0
0
Q
0
%234/
0
2
Q
.
.
3.
.
-'!
3.
$
$&'()
!!*
%UDoR5REyWLFR
!""#
Q/.
%
+,!*&!
*)%
/.
.
. 0
Q
%012/
Q
.
1
1
21
21
/)#
0
!"
#$$%
Q
3
1
&!
& ()*+
##,
%UDoR5REyWLFR
1 4
Q
Q1
'
-.#,(#
,+'
1
1
21
'4563
5
Q
[
0
[
+
[ Q
/XFDV7DGHX
/XFDV7DGHX
'DWH
'DWH
(GLWLRQ
6KHHW
'(6&5,d2
0RWRU'&99
%UDoR5REyWLFR
0RWRUGREUDoR
/XFDV7DGHX
$SSURYHGE\
/LVWDGH0DWHULDLV
48$17,'$'(
120(
0RWRUGREUDoR
&KHFNHGE\
3(d$
'HVLJQHGE\
Q
01
1
,#&
1
1
Q0
Q 03
4
0
. 3
5
6
#
%UDoR5REyWLFR
$
#$%&'(
-./-
01
0RWRUGRD
!!"
*+ )% #
)(#
31
1
01
Q1
Q21
ANEXO B - Datasheet do microcontrolador AT89S52
Features
• Compatible with MCS®-51 Products
• 8K Bytes of In-System Programmable (ISP) Flash Memory
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
– Endurance: 10,000 Write/Erase Cycles
4.0V to 5.5V Operating Range
Fully Static Operation: 0 Hz to 33 MHz
Three-level Program Memory Lock
256 x 8-bit Internal RAM
32 Programmable I/O Lines
Three 16-bit Timer/Counters
Eight Interrupt Sources
Full Duplex UART Serial Channel
Low-power Idle and Power-down Modes
Interrupt Recovery from Power-down Mode
Watchdog Timer
Dual Data Pointer
Power-off Flag
Fast Programming Time
Flexible ISP Programming (Byte and Page Mode)
Green (Pb/Halide-free) Packaging Option
1. Description
8-bit
Microcontroller
with 8K Bytes
In-System
Programmable
Flash
AT89S52
The AT89S52 is a low-power, high-performance CMOS 8-bit microcontroller with 8K
bytes of in-system programmable Flash memory. The device is manufactured using
Atmel’s high-density nonvolatile memory technology and is compatible with the industry-standard 80C51 instruction set and pinout. The on-chip Flash allows the program
memory to be reprogrammed in-system or by a conventional nonvolatile memory programmer. By combining a versatile 8-bit CPU with in-system programmable Flash on
a monolithic chip, the Atmel AT89S52 is a powerful microcontroller which provides a
highly-flexible and cost-effective solution to many embedded control applications.
The AT89S52 provides the following standard features: 8K bytes of Flash, 256 bytes
of RAM, 32 I/O lines, Watchdog timer, two data pointers, three 16-bit timer/counters, a
six-vector two-level interrupt architecture, a full duplex serial port, on-chip oscillator,
and clock circuitry. In addition, the AT89S52 is designed with static logic for operation
down to zero frequency and supports two software selectable power saving modes.
The Idle Mode stops the CPU while allowing the RAM, timer/counters, serial port, and
interrupt system to continue functioning. The Power-down mode saves the RAM contents but freezes the oscillator, disabling all other chip functions until the next interrupt
or hardware reset.
1919D–MICRO–6/08
2. Pin Configurations
P1.4
P1.3
P1.2
P1.1 (T2 EX)
P1.0 (T2)
NC
VCC
P0.0 (AD0)
P0.1 (AD1)
P0.2 (AD2)
P0.3 (AD3)
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
VCC
P0.0 (AD0)
P0.1 (AD1)
P0.2 (AD2)
P0.3 (AD3)
P0.4 (AD4)
P0.5 (AD5)
P0.6 (AD6)
P0.7 (AD7)
EA/VPP
ALE/PROG
PSEN
P2.7 (A15)
P2.6 (A14)
P2.5 (A13)
P2.4 (A12)
P2.3 (A11)
P2.2 (A10)
P2.1 (A9)
P2.0 (A8)
(MOSI) P1.5
(MISO) P1.6
(SCK) P1.7
RST
(RXD) P3.0
NC
(TXD) P3.1
(INT0) P3.2
(INT1) P3.3
(T0) P3.4
(T1) P3.5
6
5
4
3
2
1
44
43
42
41
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
44-lead PLCC
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
(T2) P1.0
(T2 EX) P1.1
P1.2
P1.3
P1.4
(MOSI) P1.5
(MISO) P1.6
(SCK) P1.7
RST
(RXD) P3.0
(TXD) P3.1
(INT0) P3.2
(INT1) P3.3
(T0) P3.4
(T1) P3.5
(WR) P3.6
(RD) P3.7
XTAL2
XTAL1
GND
P0.4 (AD4)
P0.5 (AD5)
P0.6 (AD6)
P0.7 (AD7)
EA/VPP
NC
ALE/PROG
PSEN
P2.7 (A15)
P2.6 (A14)
P2.5 (A13)
44-lead TQFP
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
P1.4
P1.3
P1.2
P1.1 (T2 EX)
P1.0 (T2)
NC
VCC
P0.0 (AD0)
P0.1 (AD1)
P0.2 (AD2)
P0.3 (AD3)
2.2
2.3
40-lead PDIP
(WR) P3.6
(RD) P3.7
XTAL2
XTAL1
GND
NC
(A8) P2.0
(A9) P2.1
(A10) P2.2
(A11) P2.3
(A12) P2.4
2.1
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
P0.4 (AD4)
P0.5 (AD5)
P0.6 (AD6)
P0.7 (AD7)
EA/VPP
NC
ALE/PROG
PSEN
P2.7 (A15)
P2.6 (A14)
P2.5 (A13)
(WR) P3.6
(RD) P3.7
XTAL2
XTAL1
GND
GND
(A8) P2.0
(A9) P2.1
(A10) P2.2
(A11) P2.3
(A12) P2.4
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
(MOSI) P1.5
(MISO) P1.6
(SCK) P1.7
RST
(RXD) P3.0
NC
(TXD) P3.1
(INT0) P3.2
(INT1) P3.3
(T0) P3.4
(T1) P3.5
2
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
3. Block Diagram
P0.0 - P0.7
P2.0 - P2.7
PORT 0 DRIVERS
PORT 2 DRIVERS
VCC
GND
RAM ADDR.
REGISTER
B
REGISTER
PORT 0
LATCH
RAM
PORT 2
LATCH
FLASH
PROGRAM
ADDRESS
REGISTER
STACK
POINTER
ACC
BUFFER
TMP2
TMP1
PC
INCREMENTER
ALU
INTERRUPT, SERIAL PORT,
AND TIMER BLOCKS
PROGRAM
COUNTER
PSW
PSEN
ALE/PROG
EA / VPP
TIMING
AND
CONTROL
INSTRUCTION
REGISTER
DUAL DPTR
RST
WATCH
DOG
PORT 3
LATCH
PORT 1
LATCH
ISP
PORT
PROGRAM
LOGIC
OSC
PORT 3 DRIVERS
P3.0 - P3.7
PORT 1 DRIVERS
P1.0 - P1.7
3
1919D–MICRO–6/08
4. Pin Description
4.1
VCC
Supply voltage.
4.2
GND
Ground.
4.3
Port 0
Port 0 is an 8-bit open drain bidirectional I/O port. As an output port, each pin can sink eight TTL
inputs. When 1s are written to port 0 pins, the pins can be used as high-impedance inputs.
Port 0 can also be configured to be the multiplexed low-order address/data bus during accesses
to external program and data memory. In this mode, P0 has internal pull-ups.
Port 0 also receives the code bytes during Flash programming and outputs the code bytes during program verification. External pull-ups are required during program verification.
4.4
Port 1
Port 1 is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with internal pull-ups. The Port 1 output buffers can
sink/source four TTL inputs. When 1s are written to Port 1 pins, they are pulled high by the internal pull-ups and can be used as inputs. As inputs, Port 1 pins that are externally being pulled low
will source current (IIL) because of the internal pull-ups.
In addition, P1.0 and P1.1 can be configured to be the timer/counter 2 external count input
(P1.0/T2) and the timer/counter 2 trigger input (P1.1/T2EX), respectively, as shown in the following table.
Port 1 also receives the low-order address bytes during Flash programming and verification.
4.5
Port Pin
Alternate Functions
P1.0
T2 (external count input to Timer/Counter 2), clock-out
P1.1
T2EX (Timer/Counter 2 capture/reload trigger and direction control)
P1.5
MOSI (used for In-System Programming)
P1.6
MISO (used for In-System Programming)
P1.7
SCK (used for In-System Programming)
Port 2
will source current (IIL) because of the internal pull-ups.
Port 2 emits the high-order address byte during fetches from external program memory and during accesses to external data memory that use 16-bit addresses (MOVX @ DPTR). In this
application, Port 2 uses strong internal pull-ups when emitting 1s. During accesses to external
data memory that use 8-bit addresses (MOVX @ RI), Port 2 emits the contents of the P2 Special
Function Register.
Port 2 also receives the high-order address bits and some control signals during Flash programming and verification.
4
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
4.6
Port 3
will source current (IIL) because of the pull-ups.
Port 3 receives some control signals for Flash programming and verification.
Port 3 also serves the functions of various special features of the AT89S52, as shown in the following table.
4.7
Port Pin
Alternate Functions
P3.0
RXD (serial input port)
P3.1
TXD (serial output port)
P3.2
INT0 (external interrupt 0)
P3.3
INT1 (external interrupt 1)
P3.4
T0 (timer 0 external input)
P3.5
T1 (timer 1 external input)
P3.6
WR (external data memory write strobe)
P3.7
RD (external data memory read strobe)
RST
Reset input. A high on this pin for two machine cycles while the oscillator is running resets the
device. This pin drives high for 98 oscillator periods after the Watchdog times out. The DISRTO
bit in SFR AUXR (address 8EH) can be used to disable this feature. In the default state of bit
DISRTO, the RESET HIGH out feature is enabled.
4.8
ALE/PROG
Address Latch Enable (ALE) is an output pulse for latching the low byte of the address during
accesses to external memory. This pin is also the program pulse input (PROG) during Flash
programming.
In normal operation, ALE is emitted at a constant rate of 1/6 the oscillator frequency and may be
used for external timing or clocking purposes. Note, however, that one ALE pulse is skipped during each access to external data memory.
If desired, ALE operation can be disabled by setting bit 0 of SFR location 8EH. With the bit set,
ALE is active only during a MOVX or MOVC instruction. Otherwise, the pin is weakly pulled high.
Setting the ALE-disable bit has no effect if the microcontroller is in external execution mode.
5
1919D–MICRO–6/08
4.9
PSEN
Program Store Enable (PSEN) is the read strobe to external program memory.
When the AT89S52 is executing code from external program memory, PSEN is activated twice
each machine cycle, except that two PSEN activations are skipped during each access to external data memory.
4.10
EA/VPP
External Access Enable. EA must be strapped to GND in order to enable the device to fetch
code from external program memory locations starting at 0000H up to FFFFH. Note, however,
that if lock bit 1 is programmed, EA will be internally latched on reset.
EA should be strapped to VCC for internal program executions.
This pin also receives the 12-volt programming enable voltage (VPP) during Flash programming.
4.11
XTAL1
Input to the inverting oscillator amplifier and input to the internal clock operating circuit.
4.12
XTAL2
Output from the inverting oscillator amplifier.
5. Special Function Registers
A map of the on-chip memory area called the Special Function Register (SFR) space is shown in
Table 5-1.
Note that not all of the addresses are occupied, and unoccupied addresses may not be implemented on the chip. Read accesses to these addresses will in general return random data, and
write accesses will have an indeterminate effect.
User software should not write 1s to these unlisted locations, since they may be used in future
products to invoke new features. In that case, the reset or inactive values of the new bits will
always be 0.
Timer 2 Registers: Control and status bits are contained in registers T2CON (shown in Table 52) and T2MOD (shown in Table 10-2) for Timer 2. The register pair (RCAP2H, RCAP2L) are the
Capture/Reload registers for Timer 2 in 16-bit capture mode or 16-bit auto-reload mode.
Interrupt Registers: The individual interrupt enable bits are in the IE register. Two priorities can
be set for each of the six interrupt sources in the IP register.
6
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
Table 5-1.
AT89S52 SFR Map and Reset Values
0F8H
0F0H
0FFH
B
00000000
0F7H
0E8H
0E0H
0EFH
ACC
00000000
0E7H
0D8H
0DFH
0D0H
PSW
00000000
0C8H
T2CON
00000000
0D7H
T2MOD
XXXXXX00
RCAP2L
00000000
RCAP2H
00000000
TL2
00000000
TH2
00000000
0CFH
0C0H
0C7H
0B8H
IP
XX000000
0BFH
0B0H
P3
11111111
0B7H
0A8H
IE
0X000000
0AFH
0A0H
P2
11111111
98H
SCON
00000000
90H
P1
11111111
88H
TCON
00000000
TMOD
00000000
TL0
00000000
TL1
00000000
TH0
00000000
TH1
00000000
80H
P0
11111111
SP
00000111
DP0L
00000000
DP0H
00000000
DP1L
00000000
DP1H
00000000
AUXR1
XXXXXXX0
WDTRST
XXXXXXXX
0A7H
SBUF
XXXXXXXX
9FH
97H
AUXR
XXX00XX0
8FH
PCON
0XXX0000
87H
7
1919D–MICRO–6/08
Table 5-2.
T2CON – Timer/Counter 2 Control Register
T2CON Address = 0C8H
Reset Value = 0000 0000B
Bit Addressable
Bit
TF2
EXF2
RCLK
TCLK
EXEN2
TR2
C/T2
CP/RL2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
Function
TF2
Timer 2 overflow flag set by a Timer 2 overflow and must be cleared by software. TF2 will not be set when either RCLK = 1
or TCLK = 1.
EXF2
Timer 2 external flag set when either a capture or reload is caused by a negative transition on T2EX and EXEN2 = 1.
When Timer 2 interrupt is enabled, EXF2 = 1 will cause the CPU to vector to the Timer 2 interrupt routine. EXF2 must be
cleared by software. EXF2 does not cause an interrupt in up/down counter mode (DCEN = 1).
RCLK
Receive clock enable. When set, causes the serial port to use Timer 2 overflow pulses for its receive clock in serial port
Modes 1 and 3. RCLK = 0 causes Timer 1 overflow to be used for the receive clock.
TCLK
Transmit clock enable. When set, causes the serial port to use Timer 2 overflow pulses for its transmit clock in serial port
Modes 1 and 3. TCLK = 0 causes Timer 1 overflows to be used for the transmit clock.
EXEN2
Timer 2 external enable. When set, allows a capture or reload to occur as a result of a negative transition on T2EX if Timer
2 is not being used to clock the serial port. EXEN2 = 0 causes Timer 2 to ignore events at T2EX.
TR2
Start/Stop control for Timer 2. TR2 = 1 starts the timer.
C/T2
Timer or counter select for Timer 2. C/T2 = 0 for timer function. C/T2 = 1 for external event counter (falling edge triggered).
CP/RL2
Capture/Reload select. CP/RL2 = 1 causes captures to occur on negative transitions at T2EX if EXEN2 = 1. CP/RL2 = 0
causes automatic reloads to occur when Timer 2 overflows or negative transitions occur at T2EX when EXEN2 = 1. When
either RCLK or TCLK = 1, this bit is ignored and the timer is forced to auto-reload on Timer 2 overflow.
8
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
AUXR: Auxiliary Register
Table 5-3.
AUXR
Address = 8EH
Reset Value = XXX00XX0B
Not Bit Addressable
Bit
–
–
–
WDIDLE
DISRTO
–
–
DISALE
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
Reserved for future expansion
DISALE
Disable/Enable ALE
DISRTO
DISALE
Operating Mode
0
ALE is emitted at a constant rate of 1/6 the oscillator frequency
1
ALE is active only during a MOVX or MOVC instruction
Disable/Enable Reset out
DISRTO
WDIDLE
0
Reset pin is driven High after WDT times out
1
Reset pin is input only
Disable/Enable WDT in IDLE mode
WDIDLE
0
WDT continues to count in IDLE mode
1
WDT halts counting in IDLE mode
Dual Data Pointer Registers: To facilitate accessing both internal and external data memory, two banks of 16-bit Data
Pointer Registers are provided: DP0 at SFR address locations 82H-83H and DP1 at 84H-85H. Bit DPS = 0 in SFR AUXR1
selects DP0 and DPS = 1 selects DP1. The user should ALWAYS initialize the DPS bit to the appropriate value before
accessing the respective Data Pointer Register.
Power Off Flag: The Power Off Flag (POF) is located at bit 4 (PCON.4) in the PCON SFR. POF is set to “1” during power
up. It can be set and rest under software control and is not affected by reset.
AUXR1: Auxiliary Register 1
Table 5-4.
AUXR1
Address = A2H
Reset Value = XXXXXXX0B
Not Bit Addressable
Bit
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
DPS
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
Reserved for future expansion
DPS
Data Pointer Register Select
DPS
0
Selects DPTR Registers DP0L, DP0H
1
Selects DPTR Registers DP1L, DP1H
9
1919D–MICRO–6/08
6. Memory Organization
MCS-51 devices have a separate address space for Program and Data Memory. Up to 64K
bytes each of external Program and Data Memory can be addressed.
6.1
Program Memory
If the EA pin is connected to GND, all program fetches are directed to external memory.
On the AT89S52, if EA is connected to VCC, program fetches to addresses 0000H through
1FFFH are directed to internal memory and fetches to addresses 2000H through FFFFH are to
external memory.
6.2
Data Memory
The AT89S52 implements 256 bytes of on-chip RAM. The upper 128 bytes occupy a parallel
address space to the Special Function Registers. This means that the upper 128 bytes have the
same addresses as the SFR space but are physically separate from SFR space.
When an instruction accesses an internal location above address 7FH, the address mode used
in the instruction specifies whether the CPU accesses the upper 128 bytes of RAM or the SFR
space. Instructions which use direct addressing access the SFR space.
For example, the following direct addressing instruction accesses the SFR at location 0A0H
(which is P2).
MOV 0A0H, #data
Instructions that use indirect addressing access the upper 128 bytes of RAM. For example, the
following indirect addressing instruction, where R0 contains 0A0H, accesses the data byte at
address 0A0H, rather than P2 (whose address is 0A0H).
MOV @R0, #data
Note that stack operations are examples of indirect addressing, so the upper 128 bytes of data
RAM are available as stack space.
7. Watchdog Timer (One-time Enabled with Reset-out)
The WDT is intended as a recovery method in situations where the CPU may be subjected to
software upsets. The WDT consists of a 14-bit counter and the Watchdog Timer Reset
(WDTRST) SFR. The WDT is defaulted to disable from exiting reset. To enable the WDT, a user
must write 01EH and 0E1H in sequence to the WDTRST register (SFR location 0A6H). When
the WDT is enabled, it will increment every machine cycle while the oscillator is running. The
WDT timeout period is dependent on the external clock frequency. There is no way to disable
the WDT except through reset (either hardware reset or WDT overflow reset). When WDT overflows, it will drive an output RESET HIGH pulse at the RST pin.
7.1
Using the WDT
To enable the WDT, a user must write 01EH and 0E1H in sequence to the WDTRST register
(SFR location 0A6H). When the WDT is enabled, the user needs to service it by writing 01EH
and 0E1H to WDTRST to avoid a WDT overflow. The 14-bit counter overflows when it reaches
16383 (3FFFH), and this will reset the device. When the WDT is enabled, it will increment every
machine cycle while the oscillator is running. This means the user must reset the WDT at least
every 16383 machine cycles. To reset the WDT the user must write 01EH and 0E1H to
WDTRST. WDTRST is a write-only register. The WDT counter cannot be read or written. When
10
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
WDT overflows, it will generate an output RESET pulse at the RST pin. The RESET pulse duration is 98xTOSC, where TOSC = 1/FOSC. To make the best use of the WDT, it should be
serviced in those sections of code that will periodically be executed within the time required to
prevent a WDT reset.
7.2
WDT During Power-down and Idle
In Power-down mode the oscillator stops, which means the WDT also stops. While in Powerdown mode, the user does not need to service the WDT. There are two methods of exiting
Power-down mode: by a hardware reset or via a level-activated external interrupt which is
enabled prior to entering Power-down mode. When Power-down is exited with hardware reset,
servicing the WDT should occur as it normally does whenever the AT89S52 is reset. Exiting
Power-down with an interrupt is significantly different. The interrupt is held low long enough for
the oscillator to stabilize. When the interrupt is brought high, the interrupt is serviced. To prevent
the WDT from resetting the device while the interrupt pin is held low, the WDT is not started until
the interrupt is pulled high. It is suggested that the WDT be reset during the interrupt service for
the interrupt used to exit Power-down mode.
To ensure that the WDT does not overflow within a few states of exiting Power-down, it is best to
reset the WDT just before entering Power-down mode.
Before going into the IDLE mode, the WDIDLE bit in SFR AUXR is used to determine whether
the WDT continues to count if enabled. The WDT keeps counting during IDLE (WDIDLE bit = 0)
as the default state. To prevent the WDT from resetting the AT89S52 while in IDLE mode, the
user should always set up a timer that will periodically exit IDLE, service the WDT, and reenter
IDLE mode.
With WDIDLE bit enabled, the WDT will stop to count in IDLE mode and resumes the count
upon exit from IDLE.
8. UART
The UART in the AT89S52 operates the same way as the UART in the AT89C51 and AT89C52.
For further information on the UART operation, please click on the document link below:
http://www.atmel.com/dyn/resources/prod_documents/DOC4316.PDF
9. Timer 0 and 1
Timer 0 and Timer 1 in the AT89S52 operate the same way as Timer 0 and Timer 1 in the
AT89C51 and AT89C52. For further information on the timers’ operation, please click on the
document link below:
http://www.atmel.com/dyn/resources/prod_documents/DOC4316.PDF
11
1919D–MICRO–6/08
10. Timer 2
Timer 2 is a 16-bit Timer/Counter that can operate as either a timer or an event counter. The
type of operation is selected by bit C/T2 in the SFR T2CON (shown in Table 5-2). Timer 2 has
three operating modes: capture, auto-reload (up or down counting), and baud rate generator.
The modes are selected by bits in T2CON, as shown in Table 10-1. Timer 2 consists of two 8-bit
registers, TH2 and TL2. In the Timer function, the TL2 register is incremented every machine
cycle. Since a machine cycle consists of 12 oscillator periods, the count rate is 1/12 of the oscillator frequency.
Timer 2 Operating Modes
Table 10-1.
RCLK +TCLK
CP/RL2
TR2
MODE
0
0
1
16-bit Auto-reload
0
1
1
16-bit Capture
1
X
1
Baud Rate Generator
X
X
0
(Off)
In the Counter function, the register is incremented in response to a 1-to-0 transition at its corresponding external input pin, T2. In this function, the external input is sampled during S5P2 of
every machine cycle. When the samples show a high in one cycle and a low in the next cycle,
the count is incremented. The new count value appears in the register during S3P1 of the cycle
following the one in which the transition was detected. Since two machine cycles (24 oscillator
periods) are required to recognize a 1-to-0 transition, the maximum count rate is 1/24 of the
oscillator frequency. To ensure that a given level is sampled at least once before it changes, the
level should be held for at least one full machine cycle.
10.1
Capture Mode
In the capture mode, two options are selected by bit EXEN2 in T2CON. If EXEN2 = 0, Timer 2 is
a 16-bit timer or counter which upon overflow sets bit TF2 in T2CON. This bit can then be used
to generate an interrupt. If EXEN2 = 1, Timer 2 performs the same operation, but a 1-to-0 transition at external input T2EX also causes the current value in TH2 and TL2 to be captured into
RCAP2H and RCAP2L, respectively. In addition, the transition at T2EX causes bit EXF2 in
T2CON to be set. The EXF2 bit, like TF2, can generate an interrupt. The capture mode is illustrated in Figure 10-1.
10.2
Auto-reload (Up or Down Counter)
Timer 2 can be programmed to count up or down when configured in its 16-bit auto-reload
mode. This feature is invoked by the DCEN (Down Counter Enable) bit located in the SFR
T2MOD (see Table 10-2). Upon reset, the DCEN bit is set to 0 so that timer 2 will default to
count up. When DCEN is set, Timer 2 can count up or down, depending on the value of the
T2EX pin.
12
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
Figure 10-1. Timer in Capture Mode
÷12
OSC
C/T2 = 0
TH2
TL2
TF2
OVERFLOW
CONTROL
TR2
C/T2 = 1
CAPTURE
T2 PIN
RCAP2H RCAP2L
TRANSITION
DETECTOR
TIMER 2
INTERRUPT
T2EX PIN
EXF2
CONTROL
EXEN2
Table 10-2.
T2MOD – Timer 2 Mode Control Register
T2MOD Address = 0C9H
Reset Value = XXXX XX00B
Not Bit Addressable
Bit
–
–
–
–
–
–
T2OE
DCEN
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
Function
–
Not implemented, reserved for future
T2OE
Timer 2 Output Enable bit
DCEN
When set, this bit allows Timer 2 to be configured as an up/down counter
Figure 10-2 shows Timer 2 automatically counting up when DCEN = 0. In this mode, two options
are selected by bit EXEN2 in T2CON. If EXEN2 = 0, Timer 2 counts up to 0FFFFH and then sets
the TF2 bit upon overflow. The overflow also causes the timer registers to be reloaded with the
16-bit value in RCAP2H and RCAP2L. The values in Timer in Capture ModeRCAP2H and
RCAP2L are preset by software. If EXEN2 = 1, a 16-bit reload can be triggered either by an
overflow or by a 1-to-0 transition at external input T2EX. This transition also sets the EXF2 bit.
Both the TF2 and EXF2 bits can generate an interrupt if enabled.
Setting the DCEN bit enables Timer 2 to count up or down, as shown in Figure 10-2. In this
mode, the T2EX pin controls the direction of the count. A logic 1 at T2EX makes Timer 2 count
up. The timer will overflow at 0FFFFH and set the TF2 bit. This overflow also causes the 16-bit
value in RCAP2H and RCAP2L to be reloaded into the timer registers, TH2 and TL2,
respectively.
A logic 0 at T2EX makes Timer 2 count down. The timer underflows when TH2 and TL2 equal
the values stored in RCAP2H and RCAP2L. The underflow sets the TF2 bit and causes 0FFFFH
to be reloaded into the timer registers.
The EXF2 bit toggles whenever Timer 2 overflows or underflows and can be used as a 17th bit
of resolution. In this operating mode, EXF2 does not flag an interrupt.
13
1919D–MICRO–6/08
Figure 10-2. Timer 2 Auto Reload Mode (DCEN = 0)
÷12
OSC
C/T2 = 0
TH2
TL2
OVERFLOW
CONTR OL
TR2
C/T2 = 1
RELO AD
T2 PIN
RCAP2H
TIMER 2
INTERRUPT
RCAP2L
TF2
TRANSITION
DETECTOR
EXF2
T2EX PIN
CONTROL
EXEN2
Figure 10-3. Timer 2 Auto Reload Mode (DCEN = 1)
TOGGLE
(DOWN COUNTING RELOAD VALUE)
0FFH
OSC
0FFH
÷ 12
EXF2
OVERFLOW
C/T2 = 0
TH2
TL2
TF2
CONTROL
TR2
TIMER 2
INTERRUPT
C/T2 = 1
T2 PIN
RCAP2H RCAP2L
(UP COUNTING RELOAD VALUE)
COUNT
DIRECTION
1=UP
0=DOWN
T2EX PIN
14
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
11. Baud Rate Generator
Timer 2 is selected as the baud rate generator by setting TCLK and/or RCLK in T2CON (Table
5-2). Note that the baud rates for transmit and receive can be different if Timer 2 is used for the
receiver or transmitter and Timer 1 is used for the other function. Setting RCLK and/or TCLK
puts Timer 2 into its baud rate generator mode, as shown in Figure 11-1.
The baud rate generator mode is similar to the auto-reload mode, in that a rollover in TH2
causes the Timer 2 registers to be reloaded with the 16-bit value in registers RCAP2H and
RCAP2L, which are preset by software.
The baud rates in Modes 1 and 3 are determined by Timer 2’s overflow rate according to the following equation.
Timer 2 Overflow Rate
Modes 1 and 3 Baud Rates = -----------------------------------------------------------16
The Timer can be configured for either timer or counter operation. In most applications, it is configured for timer operation (CP/T2 = 0). The timer operation is different for Timer 2 when it is
used as a baud rate generator. Normally, as a timer, it increments every machine cycle (at 1/12
the oscillator frequency). As a baud rate generator, however, it increments every state time (at
1/2 the oscillator frequency). The baud rate formula is given below.
Oscillator Frequency
Modes 1 and 3
--------------------------------------- = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------32 x [65536-RCAP2H,RCAP2L)]
Baud Rate
where (RCAP2H, RCAP2L) is the content of RCAP2H and RCAP2L taken as a 16-bit unsigned
integer.
Timer 2 as a baud rate generator is shown in Figure 11-1. This figure is valid only if RCLK or
TCLK = 1 in T2CON. Note that a rollover in TH2 does not set TF2 and will not generate an interrupt. Note too, that if EXEN2 is set, a 1-to-0 transition in T2EX will set EXF2 but will not cause a
reload from (RCAP2H, RCAP2L) to (TH2, TL2). Thus, when Timer 2 is in use as a baud rate
generator, T2EX can be used as an extra external interrupt.
Note that when Timer 2 is running (TR2 = 1) as a timer in the baud rate generator mode, TH2 or
TL2 should not be read from or written to. Under these conditions, the Timer is incremented
every state time, and the results of a read or write may not be accurate. The RCAP2 registers
may be read but should not be written to, because a write might overlap a reload and cause
write and/or reload errors. The timer should be turned off (clear TR2) before accessing the Timer
2 or RCAP2 registers.
15
1919D–MICRO–6/08
Figure 11-1. Timer 2 in Baud Rate Generator Mode
TIMER 1 OVERFLOW
÷2
"0"
"1"
NOTE: OSC. FREQ. IS DIVIDED BY 2, NOT 12
SMOD1
OSC
÷2
C/T2 = 0
"1"
TH2
"0"
TL2
RCLK
CONTROL
TR2
÷ 16
Rx
CLOCK
C/T2 = 1
"1"
"0"
T2 PIN
TCLK
RCAP2H RCAP2L
TRANSITION
DETECTOR
÷ 16
T2EX PIN
EXF2
Tx
CLOCK
TIMER 2
INTERRUPT
CONTROL
EXEN2
12. Programmable Clock Out
A 50% duty cycle clock can be programmed to come out on P1.0, as shown in Figure 12-1. This
pin, besides being a regular I/O pin, has two alternate functions. It can be programmed to input
the external clock for Timer/Counter 2 or to output a 50% duty cycle clock ranging from 61 Hz to
4 MHz (for a 16-MHz operating frequency).
To configure the Timer/Counter 2 as a clock generator, bit C/T2 (T2CON.1) must be cleared and
bit T2OE (T2MOD.1) must be set. Bit TR2 (T2CON.2) starts and stops the timer.
The clock-out frequency depends on the oscillator frequency and the reload value of Timer 2
capture registers (RCAP2H, RCAP2L), as shown in the following equation.
Clock-Out Frequency = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4 x [65536-(RCAP2H,RCAP2L)]
In the clock-out mode, Timer 2 roll-overs will not generate an interrupt. This behavior is similar to
when Timer 2 is used as a baud-rate generator. It is possible to use Timer 2 as a baud-rate generator and a clock generator simultaneously. Note, however, that the baud-rate and clock-out
frequencies cannot be determined independently from one another since they both use
RCAP2H and RCAP2L.
16
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
Figure 12-1. Timer 2 in Clock-Out Mode
OSC
TL2
(8-BITS)
÷2
TH2
(8-BITS)
TR2
RCAP2L RCAP2H
C/T2 BIT
P1.0
(T2)
÷2
T2OE (T2MOD.1)
TRANSITION
DETECTOR
P1.1
(T2EX)
EXF2
TIMER 2
INTERRUPT
EXEN2
13. Interrupts
The AT89S52 has a total of six interrupt vectors: two external interrupts (INT0 and INT1), three
timer interrupts (Timers 0, 1, and 2), and the serial port interrupt. These interrupts are all shown
in Figure 13-1.
Each of these interrupt sources can be individually enabled or disabled by setting or clearing a
bit in Special Function Register IE. IE also contains a global disable bit, EA, which disables all
interrupts at once.
Note that Table 13-1 shows that bit position IE.6 is unimplemented. User software should not
write a 1 to this bit position, since it may be used in future AT89 products.
Timer 2 interrupt is generated by the logical OR of bits TF2 and EXF2 in register T2CON. Neither of these flags is cleared by hardware when the service routine is vectored to. In fact, the
service routine may have to determine whether it was TF2 or EXF2 that generated the interrupt,
and that bit will have to be cleared in software.
The Timer 0 and Timer 1 flags, TF0 and TF1, are set at S5P2 of the cycle in which the timers
overflow. The values are then polled by the circuitry in the next cycle. However, the Timer 2 flag,
TF2, is set at S2P2 and is polled in the same cycle in which the timer overflows.
17
1919D–MICRO–6/08
Table 13-1.
Interrupt Enable (IE) Register
(MSB)
(LSB)
EA
–
ET2
ES
ET1
EX1
ET0
EX0
Enable Bit = 1 enables the interrupt.
Enable Bit = 0 disables the interrupt.
Symbol
Position
Function
EA
IE.7
Disables all interrupts. If EA = 0, no interrupt is acknowledged. If EA = 1, each
interrupt source is individually enabled or disabled by setting or clearing its enable bit.
–
IE.6
Reserved.
ET2
IE.5
Timer 2 interrupt enable bit.
ES
IE.4
Serial Port interrupt enable bit.
ET1
IE.3
EX1
IE.2
External interrupt 1 enable bit.
ET0
IE.1
EX0
IE.0
External interrupt 0 enable bit.
User software should never write 1s to reserved bits, because they may be used in future AT89 products.
Figure 13-1. Interrupt Sources
0
INT0
IE0
1
TF0
0
INT1
1
IE1
TF1
TI
RI
TF2
EXF2
18
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
14. Oscillator Characteristics
XTAL1 and XTAL2 are the input and output, respectively, of an inverting amplifier that can be
configured for use as an on-chip oscillator, as shown in Figure 16-1. Either a quartz crystal or
ceramic resonator may be used. To drive the device from an external clock source, XTAL2
should be left unconnected while XTAL1 is driven, as shown in Figure 16-2. There are no
requirements on the duty cycle of the external clock signal, since the input to the internal clocking circuitry is through a divide-by-two flip-flop, but minimum and maximum voltage high and low
time specifications must be observed.
15. Idle Mode
In idle mode, the CPU puts itself to sleep while all the on-chip peripherals remain active. The
mode is invoked by software. The content of the on-chip RAM and all the special functions registers remain unchanged during this mode. The idle mode can be terminated by any enabled
interrupt or by a hardware reset.
Note that when idle mode is terminated by a hardware reset, the device normally resumes program execution from where it left off, up to two machine cycles before the internal reset
algorithm takes control. On-chip hardware inhibits access to internal RAM in this event, but
access to the port pins is not inhibited. To eliminate the possibility of an unexpected write to a
port pin when idle mode is terminated by a reset, the instruction following the one that invokes
idle mode should not write to a port pin or to external memory.
16. Power-down Mode
In the Power-down mode, the oscillator is stopped, and the instruction that invokes Power-down
is the last instruction executed. The on-chip RAM and Special Function Registers retain their
values until the Power-down mode is terminated. Exit from Power-down mode can be initiated
either by a hardware reset or by an enabled external interrupt. Reset redefines the SFRs but
does not change the on-chip RAM. The reset should not be activated before VCC is restored to
its normal operating level and must be held active long enough to allow the oscillator to restart
and stabilize.
Figure 16-1. Oscillator Connections
C2
XTAL2
C1
XTAL1
GND
Note:
1.
C1, C2 = 30 pF ± 10 pF for Crystals
= 40 pF ± 10 pF for Ceramic Resonators
19
1919D–MICRO–6/08
Figure 16-2. External Clock Drive Configuration
NC
XTAL2
EXTERNAL
OSCILLATOR
SIGNAL
XTAL1
GND
Status of External Pins During Idle and Power-down Modes
Table 16-1.
Mode
Program
Memory
Idle
ALE
PSEN
PORT0
PORT1
PORT2
PORT3
Internal
1
1
Data
Data
Data
Data
Idle
External
1
1
Float
Data
Address
Data
Power-down
Internal
0
0
Data
Data
Data
Data
Power-down
External
0
0
Float
Data
Data
Data
17. Program Memory Lock Bits
The AT89S52 has three lock bits that can be left unprogrammed (U) or can be programmed (P)
to obtain the additional features listed in Table 17-1.
Lock Bit Protection Modes
Table 17-1.
Program Lock Bits
1
LB1
LB2
LB3
Protection Type
U
U
U
No program lock features
2
P
U
U
MOVC instructions executed from external program memory
are disabled from fetching code bytes from internal memory, EA
is sampled and latched on reset, and further programming of
the Flash memory is disabled
3
P
P
U
Same as mode 2, but verify is also disabled
4
P
P
P
Same as mode 3, but external execution is also disabled
When lock bit 1 is programmed, the logic level at the EA pin is sampled and latched during reset.
If the device is powered up without a reset, the latch initializes to a random value and holds that
value until reset is activated. The latched value of EA must agree with the current logic level at
that pin in order for the device to function properly.
20
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
18. Programming the Flash – Parallel Mode
The AT89S52 is shipped with the on-chip Flash memory array ready to be programmed. The
programming interface needs a high-voltage (12-volt) program enable signal and is compatible
with conventional third-party Flash or EPROM programmers.
The AT89S52 code memory array is programmed byte-by-byte.
Programming Algorithm: Before programming the AT89S52, the address, data, and control
signals should be set up according to the “Flash Programming Modes” (Table 22-1) and Figure
22-1 and Figure 22-2. To program the AT89S52, take the following steps:
1. Input the desired memory location on the address lines.
2. Input the appropriate data byte on the data lines.
3. Activate the correct combination of control signals.
4. Raise EA/VPP to 12V.
5. Pulse ALE/PROG once to program a byte in the Flash array or the lock bits. The bytewrite cycle is self-timed and typically takes no more than 50 µs. Repeat steps 1
through 5, changing the address and data for the entire array or until the end of the
object file is reached.
Data Polling: The AT89S52 features Data Polling to indicate the end of a byte write cycle. During a write cycle, an attempted read of the last byte written will result in the complement of the
written data on P0.7. Once the write cycle has been completed, true data is valid on all outputs,
and the next cycle may begin. Data Polling may begin any time after a write cycle has been
initiated.
Ready/Busy: The progress of byte programming can also be monitored by the RDY/BSY output
signal. P3.0 is pulled low after ALE goes high during programming to indicate BUSY. P3.0 is
pulled high again when programming is done to indicate READY.
Program Verify: If lock bits LB1 and LB2 have not been programmed, the programmed code
data can be read back via the address and data lines for verification. The status of the individual lock bits can be verified directly by reading them back.
Reading the Signature Bytes: The signature bytes are read by the same procedure as a normal verification of locations 000H, 100H, and 200H, except that P3.6 and P3.7 must be pulled to
a logic low. The values returned are as follows.
(000H) = 1EH indicates manufactured by Atmel
(100H) = 52H indicates AT89S52
(200H) = 06H
Chip Erase: In the parallel programming mode, a chip erase operation is initiated by using the
proper combination of control signals and by pulsing ALE/PROG low for a duration of 200 ns 500 ns.
In the serial programming mode, a chip erase operation is initiated by issuing the Chip Erase
instruction. In this mode, chip erase is self-timed and takes about 500 ms.
During chip erase, a serial read from any address location will return 00H at the data output.
21
1919D–MICRO–6/08
19. Programming the Flash – Serial Mode
The Code memory array can be programmed using the serial ISP interface while RST is pulled
to VCC. The serial interface consists of pins SCK, MOSI (input) and MISO (output). After RST is
set high, the Programming Enable instruction needs to be executed first before other operations
can be executed. Before a reprogramming sequence can occur, a Chip Erase operation is
required.
The Chip Erase operation turns the content of every memory location in the Code array into
FFH.
Either an external system clock can be supplied at pin XTAL1 or a crystal needs to be connected
across pins XTAL1 and XTAL2. The maximum serial clock (SCK) frequency should be less than
1/16 of the crystal frequency. With a 33 MHz oscillator clock, the maximum SCK frequency is
2 MHz.
20. Serial Programming Algorithm
To program and verify the AT89S52 in the serial programming mode, the following sequence is
recommended:
1. Power-up sequence:
a. Apply power between VCC and GND pins.
b.
Set RST pin to “H”.
If a crystal is not connected across pins XTAL1 and XTAL2, apply a 3 MHz to 33 MHz clock to
XTAL1 pin and wait for at least 10 milliseconds.
2. Enable serial programming by sending the Programming Enable serial instruction to pin
MOSI/P1.5. The frequency of the shift clock supplied at pin SCK/P1.7 needs to be less
than the CPU clock at XTAL1 divided by 16.
3. The Code array is programmed one byte at a time in either the Byte or Page mode. The
write cycle is self-timed and typically takes less than 0.5 ms at 5V.
4. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the
content at the selected address at serial output MISO/P1.6.
5. At the end of a programming session, RST can be set low to commence normal device
operation.
Power-off sequence (if needed):
1. Set XTAL1 to “L” (if a crystal is not used).
2. Set RST to “L”.
3. Turn VCC power off.
Data Polling: The Data Polling feature is also available in the serial mode. In this mode, during
a write cycle an attempted read of the last byte written will result in the complement of the MSB
of the serial output byte on MISO.
21. Serial Programming Instruction Set
The Instruction Set for Serial Programming follows a 4-byte protocol and is shown in Table 24-1.
22
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
22. Programming Interface – Parallel Mode
Every code byte in the Flash array can be programmed by using the appropriate combination of
control signals. The write operation cycle is self-timed and once initiated, will automatically time
itself to completion.
Most major worldwide programming vendors offer support for the Atmel AT89 microcontroller
series. Please contact your local programming vendor for the appropriate software revision.
Table 22-1.
Flash Programming Modes
Mode
VCC
RST
PSEN
Write Code Data
5V
H
L
Read Code Data
5V
H
L
P0.7-0
P2.4-0
P1.7-0
ALE/
EA/
PROG
VPP
P2.6
P2.7
P3.3
P3.6
P3.7
Data
12V
L
H
H
H
H
DIN
A12-8
A7-0
H
L
L
L
H
H
DOUT
A12-8
A7-0
12V
H
H
H
H
H
X
X
X
12V
H
H
H
L
L
X
X
X
12V
H
L
H
H
L
X
X
X
H
H
H
L
H
L
P0.2,
P0.3,
P0.4
X
X
12V
H
L
H
L
L
X
X
X
Address
(2)
H
(3)
Write Lock Bit 1
5V
H
L
Write Lock Bit 2
5V
H
L
Write Lock Bit 3
5V
H
L
5V
H
L
Chip Erase
5V
H
L
Read Atmel ID
5V
H
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
1EH
X 0000
00H
Read Device ID
5V
H
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
52H
X 0001
00H
Read Device ID
5V
H
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
06H
X 0010
00H
(3)
(3)
Read Lock Bits
1, 2, 3
H
(1)
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Each PROG pulse is 200 ns - 500 ns for Chip Erase.
Each PROG pulse is 200 ns - 500 ns for Write Code Data.
Each PROG pulse is 200 ns - 500 ns for Write Lock Bits.
RDY/BSY signal is output on P3.0 during programming.
X = don’t care.
23
1919D–MICRO–6/08
Figure 22-1. Programming the Flash Memory (Parallel Mode)
VCC
AT89S52
ADDR.
0000H/1FFFH
A0 - A7
A8 - A12
VCC
P1.0-P1.7
P2.6
P2.7
P3.3
P3.6
SEE FLASH
PROGRAMMING
MODES TABLE
PGM
DATA
P0
P2.0 - P2.4
ALE
PROG
EA
VIH/VPP
P3.7
XTAL2
3-33 MHz
XTAL1
GND
P3.0
RDY/
BSY
RST
VIH
PSEN
Figure 22-2. Verifying the Flash Memory (Parallel Mode)
VCC
AT89S52
A0 - A7
ADDR.
0000H/1FFFH
A8 - A12
SEE FLASH
PROGRAMMING
MODES TABLE
P1.0-P1.7
VCC
P2.0 - P2.4
P0
P2.6
P2.7
P3.3
P3.6
P3.7
PGM DATA
(USE 10K
PULLUPS)
ALE
VIH
XTAL 2
EA
XTAL1
RST
3-33 MHz
GND
24
VIH
PSEN
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
23. Flash Programming and Verification Characteristics (Parallel Mode)
TA = 20°C to 30°C, VCC = 4.5 to 5.5V
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Max
Units
VPP
Programming Supply Voltage
11.5
12.5
V
IPP
Programming Supply Current
10
mA
ICC
VCC Supply Current
30
mA
1/tCLCL
33
MHz
tAVGL
Address Setup to PROG Low
48 tCLCL
tGHAX
Address Hold After PROG
48 tCLCL
tDVGL
Data Setup to PROG Low
48 tCLCL
tGHDX
Data Hold After PROG
48 tCLCL
tEHSH
P2.7 (ENABLE) High to VPP
48 tCLCL
tSHGL
VPP Setup to PROG Low
10
µs
tGHSL
VPP Hold After PROG
10
µs
tGLGH
PROG Width
0.2
tAVQV
Address to Data Valid
48 tCLCL
tELQV
ENABLE Low to Data Valid
48 tCLCL
tEHQZ
Data Float After ENABLE
tGHBL
PROG High to BUSY Low
1.0
µs
tWC
Byte Write Cycle Time
50
µs
3
1
0
µs
48 tCLCL
Figure 23-1. Flash Programming and Verification Waveforms – Parallel Mode
PROGRAMMING
ADDRESS
P1.0 - P1.7
P2.0 - P2.4
VERIFICATION
ADDRESS
tAVQV
PORT 0
DATA IN
tAVGL
tDVGL
tGHDX
DATA OUT
tGHAX
ALE/PROG
tSHGL
tGLGH
VPP
LOGIC 1
LOGIC 0
EA/VPP
P2.7
(ENABLE)
tGHSL
tEHSH
tEHQZ
tELQV
tGHBL
P3.0
(RDY/BSY)
BUSY
READY
tWC
25
1919D–MICRO–6/08
Figure 23-2. Flash Memory Serial Downloading
VCC
AT89S52
VCC
INSTRUCTION
INPUT
P1.5/MOSI
DATA OUTPUT
P1.6/MISO
P1.7/SCK
CLOCK IN
XTAL2
3-33 MHz
XTAL1
RST
VIH
GND
24. Flash Programming and Verification Waveforms – Serial Mode
Figure 24-1. Serial Programming Waveforms
7
26
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
Table 24-1.
Serial Programming Instruction Set
Instruction
Format
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Operation
1010 1100
0101 0011
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
0110 1001
(Output on
MISO)
Enable Serial Programming
while RST is high
xxxx xxxx
Chip Erase Flash memory
array
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Read data from Program
memory in the byte mode
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Read Program Memory
(Byte Mode)
0010 0000
xxx
Write Program Memory
(Byte Mode)
0100 0000
xxx
Write data to Program
memory in the byte mode
Write Lock Bits(1)
1010 1100
1110 00
0010 0100
xxxx xxxx
0010 1000
xxx
0011 0000
xxx
0101 0000
xxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxx
Note:
A7
Write Program Memory
(Page Mode)
Read back current status of
the lock bits (a programmed
lock bit reads back as a “1”)
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
Read Program Memory
(Page Mode)
xx
Signature Byte
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
Read Signature Bytes
Write Lock bits. See Note (1).
Byte 0
Byte 1...
Byte 255
Read data from Program
memory in the Page Mode
(256 bytes)
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
Read Lock Bits
LB2
LB1
100x xxxx
B1
B2
xxxx xxxx
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
1010 1100
Chip Erase
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
Programming Enable
LB3
Instruction
Byte 0
Byte 1...
Byte 255
Write data to Program
memory in the Page Mode
(256 bytes)
1. B1 = 0, B2 = 0 ---> Mode 1, no lock protection
B1 = 0, B2 = 1 ---> Mode 2, lock bit 1 activated
xxx xxx0
}
Read Signature Byte
Each of the lock bit modes needs to be activated sequentially
before Mode 4 can be executed.
After Reset signal is high, SCK should be low for at least 64 system clocks before it goes high to
clock in the enable data bytes. No pulsing of Reset signal is necessary. SCK should be no faster
than 1/16 of the system clock at XTAL1.
For Page Read/Write, the data always starts from byte 0 to 255. After the command byte and
upper address byte are latched, each byte thereafter is treated as data until all 256 bytes are
shifted in/out. Then the next instruction will be ready to be decoded.
27
1919D–MICRO–6/08
25. Serial Programming Characteristics
Figure 25-1. Serial Programming Timing
MOSI
tSHOX
tOVSH
SCK
tSLSH
tSHSL
MISO
tSLIV
Table 25-1.
Serial Programming Characteristics, TA = -40⋅ C to 85⋅ C, VCC = 4.0 - 5.5V (Unless Otherwise Noted)
Symbol
Parameter
1/tCLCL
3
tCLCL
Oscillator Period
30
ns
tSHSL
SCK Pulse Width High
8 tCLCL
ns
tSLSH
SCK Pulse Width Low
8 tCLCL
ns
tOVSH
MOSI Setup to SCK High
tCLCL
ns
tSHOX
MOSI Hold after SCK High
2 tCLCL
ns
tSLIV
SCK Low to MISO Valid
tERASE
Chip Erase Instruction Cycle Time
tSWC
Serial Byte Write Cycle Time
28
Min
10
Typ
16
Max
Units
33
MHz
32
ns
500
ms
64 tCLCL + 400
µs
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
26. Absolute Maximum Ratings*
Operating Temperature.................................. -55°C to +125°C
*NOTICE:
Storage Temperature ..................................... -65°C to +150°C
Voltage on Any Pin
with Respect to Ground .....................................-1.0V to +7.0V
Maximum Operating Voltage ............................................ 6.6V
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute
Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and
functional operation of the device at these or any
other conditions beyond those indicated in the
operational sections of this specification is not
implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating
conditions for extended periods may affect
device reliability.
DC Output Current...................................................... 15.0 mA
27. DC Characteristics
The values shown in this table are valid for TA = -40°C to 85°C and VCC = 4.0V to 5.5V, unless otherwise noted.
Symbol
Parameter
Condition
Min
VIL
Input Low Voltage
(Except EA)
-0.5
0.2 VCC-0.1
V
VIL1
Input Low Voltage (EA)
-0.5
0.2 VCC-0.3
V
VIH
Input High Voltage
0.2 VCC+0.9
VCC+0.5
V
VIH1
Input High Voltage
0.7 VCC
VCC+0.5
V
IOL = 1.6 mA
0.45
V
IOL = 3.2 mA
0.45
V
VOL
Output Low Voltage
(Except XTAL1, RST)
(XTAL1, RST)
(1)
(Ports 1,2,3)
Max
Units
(1)
VOL1
Output Low Voltage
(Port 0, ALE, PSEN)
VOH
Output High Voltage
(Ports 1,2,3, ALE, PSEN)
IOH = -60 µA, VCC = 5V ± 10%
2.4
V
IOH = -25 µA
0.75 VCC
V
IOH = -10 µA
0.9 VCC
V
2.4
V
IOH = -300 µA
0.75 VCC
V
IOH = -80 µA
0.9 VCC
V
IOH = -800 µA, VCC = 5V ± 10%
Output High Voltage
(Port 0 in External Bus Mode)
VOH1
IIL
Logical 0 Input Current (Ports 1,2,3)
VIN = 0.45V
-50
µA
ITL
Logical 1 to 0 Transition Current
(Ports 1,2,3)
VIN = 2V, VCC = 5V ± 10%
-300
µA
ILI
Input Leakage Current (Port 0, EA)
0.45 < VIN < VCC
±10
µA
RRST
Reset Pulldown Resistor
300
KΩ
CIO
Pin Capacitance
10
pF
50
Test Freq. = 1 MHz, TA = 25°C
Active Mode, 12 MHz
25
mA
Idle Mode, 12 MHz
6.5
mA
VCC = 5.5V
50
µA
Power Supply Current
ICC
Power-down Mode(1)
Notes:
1. Under steady state (non-transient) conditions, IOL must be externally limited as follows:
Maximum IOL per port pin: 10 mA
Maximum IOL per 8-bit port:
Port 0: 26 mA
Ports 1, 2, 3: 15 mA
Maximum total IOL for all output pins: 71 mA
If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater
than the listed test conditions.
2. Minimum VCC for Power-down is 2V.
29
1919D–MICRO–6/08
28. AC Characteristics
Under operating conditions, load capacitance for Port 0, ALE/PROG, and PSEN = 100 pF; load capacitance for all other
outputs = 80 pF.
28.1
External Program and Data Memory Characteristics
12 MHz Oscillator
Variable Oscillator
Min
Min
Max
Units
0
33
MHz
Symbol
Parameter
1/tCLCL
tLHLL
ALE Pulse Width
127
2tCLCL-40
ns
tAVLL
Address Valid to ALE Low
43
tCLCL-25
ns
tLLAX
Address Hold After ALE Low
48
tCLCL-25
ns
tLLIV
ALE Low to Valid Instruction In
tLLPL
ALE Low to PSEN Low
43
tCLCL-25
ns
tPLPH
PSEN Pulse Width
205
3tCLCL-45
ns
tPLIV
PSEN Low to Valid Instruction In
tPXIX
Input Instruction Hold After PSEN
tPXIZ
Input Instruction Float After PSEN
tPXAV
PSEN to Address Valid
tAVIV
Address to Valid Instruction In
312
5tCLCL-80
ns
tPLAZ
PSEN Low to Address Float
10
10
ns
tRLRH
RD Pulse Width
400
6tCLCL-100
ns
tWLWH
WR Pulse Width
400
6tCLCL-100
ns
tRLDV
RD Low to Valid Data In
tRHDX
Data Hold After RD
tRHDZ
Data Float After RD
97
2tCLCL-28
ns
tLLDV
ALE Low to Valid Data In
517
8tCLCL-150
ns
tAVDV
Address to Valid Data In
585
9tCLCL-165
ns
tLLWL
ALE Low to RD or WR Low
200
3tCLCL+50
ns
tAVWL
Address to RD or WR Low
203
4tCLCL-75
ns
tQVWX
Data Valid to WR Transition
23
tCLCL-30
ns
tQVWH
Data Valid to WR High
433
7tCLCL-130
ns
tWHQX
Data Hold After WR
33
tCLCL-25
ns
tRLAZ
RD Low to Address Float
tWHLH
RD or WR High to ALE High
30
Max
233
4tCLCL-65
145
0
3tCLCL-60
0
59
75
ns
5tCLCL-90
0
300
3tCLCL-50
0
43
ns
tCLCL-8
0
123
tCLCL-25
ns
ns
tCLCL-25
252
ns
ns
ns
0
ns
tCLCL+25
ns
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
29. External Program Memory Read Cycle
tLHLL
ALE
tAVLL
tLLIV
tLLPL
tPLIV
PSEN
tPXAV
tPLAZ
tPXIZ
tLLAX
tPXIX
A0 - A7
PORT 0
tPLPH
INSTR IN
A0 - A7
tAVIV
A8 - A15
PORT 2
A8 - A15
30. External Data Memory Read Cycle
tLHLL
ALE
tWHLH
PSEN
tLLDV
tRLRH
tLLWL
RD
tLLAX
tAVLL
PORT 0
tRLDV
tRLAZ
A0 - A7 FROM RI OR DPL
tRHDZ
tRHDX
DATA IN
A0 - A7 FROM PCL
INSTR IN
tAVWL
tAVDV
PORT 2
P2.0 - P2.7 OR A8 - A15 FROM DPH
A8 - A15 FROM PCH
31
1919D–MICRO–6/08
31. External Data Memory Write Cycle
tLHLL
ALE
tWHLH
PSEN
tLLWL
WR
tAVLL
PORT 0
tLLAX
tQVWX
A0 - A7 FROM RI OR DPL
tWLWH
tQVWH
DATA OUT
tWHQX
A0 - A7 FROM PCL
INSTR IN
tAVWL
PORT 2
P2.0 - P2.7 OR A8 - A15 FROM DPH
A8 - A15 FROM PCH
32. External Clock Drive Waveforms
tCHCX
VCC - 0.5V
tCHCX
tCLCH
tCHCL
0.7 VCC
0.2 VCC - 0.1V
0.45V
tCLCX
tCLCL
33. External Clock Drive
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Max
Units
1/tCLCL
0
33
MHz
tCLCL
Clock Period
30
ns
tCHCX
High Time
12
ns
tCLCX
Low Time
12
ns
tCLCH
Rise Time
5
ns
tCHCL
Fall Time
5
ns
32
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
34. Serial Port Timing: Shift Register Mode Test Conditions
The values in this table are valid for VCC = 4.0V to 5.5V and Load Capacitance = 80 pF.
12 MHz Osc
Variable Oscillator
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Max
Min
Max
tXLXL
Serial Port Clock Cycle Time
1.0
12 tCLCL
µs
tQVXH
Output Data Setup to Clock Rising Edge
700
10 tCLCL-133
ns
tXHQX
Output Data Hold After Clock Rising Edge
50
2 tCLCL-80
ns
tXHDX
Input Data Hold After Clock Rising Edge
0
0
ns
tXHDV
Clock Rising Edge to Input Data Valid
700
Units
10 tCLCL-133
ns
35. Shift Register Mode Timing Waveforms
INSTRUCTION
ALE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
tXLXL
CLOCK
tQVXH
tXHQX
WRITE TO SBUF
0
1
2
tXHDV
OUTPUT DATA
CLEAR RI
3
4
5
6
tXHDX
VALID
VALID
VALID
7
SET TI
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
VALID
SET RI
INPUT DATA
36. AC Testing Input/Output Waveforms(1)
VCC - 0.5V
0.2 VCC + 0.9V
TEST POINTS
0.2 VCC - 0.1V
0.45V
Note:
1. AC Inputs during testing are driven at VCC - 0.5V
for a logic 1 and 0.45V for a logic 0. Timing measurements are made at VIH min. for a logic 1 and VIL max. for a logic 0.
37. Float Waveforms(1)
V LOAD+
0.1V
V LOAD
V LOAD -
Note:
0.1V
V OL -
0.1V
V OL +
0.1V
Timing Reference
Points
1. For timing purposes, a port pin is no longer floating when a 100 mV change from load voltage occurs. A port pin begins to
float when a 100 mV change from the loaded VOH/VOL level occurs.
33
1919D–MICRO–6/08
38. Ordering Information
38.1
Green Package Option (Pb/Halide-free)
Speed
(MHz)
24
33
Power
Supply
Ordering Code
Package
4.0V to 5.5V
AT89S52-24AU
AT89S52-24JU
AT89S52-24PU
44A
44J
40P6
Operation Range
Industrial
(-40° C to 85° C)
4.5V to 5.5V
AT89S52-33AU
AT89S52-33JU
AT89S52-33PU
44A
44J
40P6
Industrial
(-40° C to 85° C)
Package Type
44A
44-lead, Thin Plastic Gull Wing Quad Flatpack (TQFP)
44J
44-lead, Plastic J-leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC)
40P6
40-pin, 0.600" Wide, Plastic Dual Inline Package (PDIP)
34
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
39. Packaging Information
39.1
44A – TQFP
PIN 1
B
PIN 1 IDENTIFIER
E1
e
E
D1
D
C
0˚~7˚
A1
A2
A
L
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
MIN
NOM
MAX
A
–
–
1.20
A1
0.05
–
0.15
SYMBOL
Notes:
1. This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-026, Variation ACB.
2. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold protrusion. Allowable
protrusion is 0.25 mm per side. Dimensions D1 and E1 are maximum
plastic body size dimensions including mold mismatch.
3. Lead coplanarity is 0.10 mm maximum.
A2
0.95
1.00
1.05
D
11.75
12.00
12.25
D1
9.90
10.00
10.10
E
11.75
12.00
12.25
E1
9.90
10.00
10.10
B
0.30
–
0.45
C
0.09
–
0.20
L
0.45
–
0.75
e
NOTE
Note 2
Note 2
0.80 TYP
10/5/2001
TITLE
R
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
44A, 44-lead, 10 x 10 mm Body Size, 1.0 mm Body Thickness,
0.8 mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP)
DRAWING NO.
REV.
44A
B
35
1919D–MICRO–6/08
39.2
44J – PLCC
1.14(0.045) X 45˚
PIN NO. 1
1.14(0.045) X 45˚
0.318(0.0125)
0.191(0.0075)
IDENTIFIER
E1
B
E
D2/E2
B1
e
A2
D1
A1
D
A
0.51(0.020)MAX
45˚ MAX (3X)
COMMON DIMENSIONS
Notes:
1. This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-018, Variation AC.
2. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold protrusion.
Allowable protrusion is .010"(0.254 mm) per side. Dimension D1
and E1 include mold mismatch and are measured at the extreme
material condition at the upper or lower parting line.
3. Lead coplanarity is 0.004" (0.102 mm) maximum.
SYMBOL
MIN
NOM
MAX
A
4.191
–
4.572
A1
2.286
–
3.048
A2
0.508
–
–
D
17.399
–
17.653
D1
16.510
–
16.662
E
17.399
–
17.653
E1
16.510
–
16.662
D2/E2
14.986
–
16.002
B
0.660
–
0.813
B1
0.330
–
0.533
e
NOTE
Note 2
Note 2
1.270 TYP
10/04/01
R
36
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE
44J, 44-lead, Plastic J-leaded Chip Carrier (PLCC)
DRAWING NO.
REV.
44J
B
AT89S52
1919D–MICRO–6/08
AT89S52
39.3
40P6 – PDIP
D
PIN
1
E1
A
SEATING PLANE
A1
L
B
B1
e
E
0º ~ 15º
C
COMMON DIMENSIONS
REF
MIN
NOM
MAX
A
–
–
4.826
A1
0.381
–
–
D
52.070
–
52.578
E
15.240
–
15.875
E1
13.462
–
13.970
B
0.356
–
0.559
B1
1.041
–
1.651
L
3.048
–
3.556
SYMBOL
eB
Notes:
1. This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-011, Variation AC.
2. Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold Flash or Protrusion.
Mold Flash or Protrusion shall not exceed 0.25 mm (0.010").
C
0.203
–
0.381
eB
15.494
–
17.526
e
NOTE
Note 2
Note 2
2.540 TYP
09/28/01
R
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE
40P6, 40-lead (0.600"/15.24 mm Wide) Plastic Dual
Inline Package (PDIP)
DRAWING NO.
40P6
REV.
B
37
1919D–MICRO–6/08
Headquarters
International
Atmel Corporation
San Jose, CA 95131
USA
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311
Fax: 1(408) 487-2600
Atmel Asia
Room 1219
Chinachem Golden Plaza
77 Mody Road Tsimshatsui
East Kowloon
Hong Kong
Tel: (852) 2721-9778
Fax: (852) 2722-1369
Atmel Europe
Le Krebs
8, Rue Jean-Pierre Timbaud
BP 309
78054 Saint-Quentin-enYvelines Cedex
France
Tel: (33) 1-30-60-70-00
Fax: (33) 1-30-60-71-11
Atmel Japan
9F, Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg.
1-24-8 Shinkawa
Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033
Japan
Tel: (81) 3-3523-3551
Fax: (81) 3-3523-7581
Technical Support
[email protected]
Sales Contact
www.atmel.com/contacts
Product Contact
Web Site
www.atmel.com
Literature Requests
www.atmel.com/literature
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any
intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN ATMEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE LOCATED ON ATMEL’S WEB SITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY
WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF
THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no
representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications
and product descriptions at any time without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided
otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel’s products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use
as components in applications intended to support or sustain life.
© 2008 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved. Atmel®, logo and combinations thereof, and others are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Atmel Corporation or its subsidiaries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others.
1919D–MICRO–6/08
ANEXO C - Como calcular o capacitor de reset dos
microcontroladores da família 8051.
How to Calculate the Capacitor of the Reset
Input of a C51 Microcontroller
80C51
This application note explains how the reset of the 80C51 microcontroller works when
the RST pin is a pure input pin and when the RST input is bi-directional. It gives rules
to determine the extra components required to operate the reset function properly.
The reset process can be active on low or high level depending on the product. In this
application note only the high level case is discussed.
Microcontrollers
Application Note
Introduction
The reset is used to start-up or to restart the 80C51 microcontroller activities. It forces
the 80C51 in a known state by reinitializing all the internal registers needed to properly
start the program execution. The reset must be kept active until all three of the following conditions are respected:
•
The power supply must be in the specified range.
•
The oscillator must reach a minimum oscillation level to ensure a good noise to
signal ratio and a correct internal duty cycle generation.
•
The reset pulse width duration must be at least two machine cycles.
If one of the conditions is not respected the microcontroller will not startup properly.
Theory of Reset Operation
To ensure a good startup, the reset pulse width has to be wide enough to cover the
period of time where the electrical conditions are not met. Two parameters should be
considered for a proper reset sequence to determine the reset pulse width (see
Figure 1):
•
tosc: time needed by the oscillator to reach the Vih1 or Vil1 level.
•
tvddrise: rise time of the power-supply taken between 10 to 90% of VDD.
When these two parameter conditions are met, the reset has to be maintained at least
two machine cycles in order to synchronize the internal activity of the core. In normal
mode, a machine cycle is 12-clock periods and in X2 mode is 6-clock periods.
Rev. 4284A–8051–09/03
Figure 1. tosc and tvddrise are the Two Parameters to Evaluate, Depending on the
Application
treset
tosc
Vih1
VDD
tvddrise
XTAL1
Vih1 is the reference parameter taken to calculate and determine the time constant of
the reset. Indeed, normally the input is considered to be low when its level reaches Vil1.
But in reality the trigger is somewhere between Vih1 and Vil1. So, the worst case condition is considered at the Vih1 level.
When the reset is released, the program execution starts and the ALE signal toggles as
it is illustrated in Figure 2. and showing a proper startup condition:
• VDD is within the voltage operating range,
• The level of Xtal1 is greater than the Vih1 level specification,
• The reset reached its active level (Vih1) and is maintained at least two machine
cycles.
Figure 2. Reset Conditions to Properly Startup a Microcontroller
ALE
V
VDDDD
Vrst
Reset is released
XTAL2
2
C51 Reset Guidelines
4284A–8051–09/03
Why Does the Reset Does Not
Properly Start the
Microcontroller?
The Oscillator is not Stabilized
Figure 3 shows the case where the RST signal is applied while the oscillator is not stabilized and there is no clock to reset the internal registers of the CPU. Due to this bad
reset, the first address fetched can be anywhere in the program space except address
0000h.
Figure 3. If electrical Conditions are not Met, the Reset Signal is Applied but without the
Clock
ALE
VDD
The reset is applied
while the clock is not
stabilized
XTAL2
Vrst
Reset is Released before VDD is
Stable
Figure 4 shows the case where the reset is released before the VDD is stable. The microcontroller will never see the reset and can start anywhere in the program space and with
a bad register initialization.
Figure 4. The Reset is Released before the Clock and the VDD are Stable
ALE
VDD
XTAL2
Vrst
3
4284A–8051–09/03
Reset Input Circuitry
Description
At least two kinds of reset input structure exist in C51 products. The first one is a pure
input which allows an external device to reset the microcontroller. The second one is bidirectional. The microcontroller can be reset by an external device. The microcontroller
can reset an external device when, for example the internal watchdog expires. Table 1
lists some C51 Atmel products which have uni-directional or bi-directional reset.
Table 1. Examples of Products Using Uni-directional and Bi-directional Reset
Product
Main Features
Uni/Bidir
T83C51RB2
16 KB of ROM, Watchdog
B
T89C51RD2
64 KB of Flash, Watchdog
B
AT89C51CC01
10-bit ADC, CAN controller
B
AT89C51SND1
MP3 decoder, TWI, MMC, USB
U
uni-directional Reset
Input
Description
The uni-directional reset input circuitry is shown in Figure 5. A pull-down resistor, Rrst,
is connected between the RST input and the ground. An external capacitor, Crst, is connected between the RST input and the VDD. The value of Crst determines the reset time
duration. The calculation of Crst is explained in the next chapter.
Figure 5. Reset Structure for an uni-directional Circuitry
Theory of Operation
4
When a reset is applied on the RST input, Crst is discharged and then charged through
Rrst. The reset is active until the level applied on the RST pin is below Vih1. Crst determines the reset pulse width duration.
4284A–8051–09/03
Bi-directional Reset
Input
Description
The bi-directional reset circuitry is shown in Figure 6. In addition to the uni-directional
structure, the RST pin is able to drive an external reset for example when a watchdog
expires. To do this, a pull-up resistor (Rrstwt) controlled by the rstcon signal drives a
high level on the RST pin. An extra resistor (Rrstext) must be added between the RST
input and Crst (Figure 6.).
Figure 6. Reset Structure in a Bi-directional Mode
2
VDD
1
rstcon
Crst
Rrstwt
Rrstext
RST
Internal reset
Rrst
External reset
Reset
circuitry
vrst(t)
Oscillator
2
X1
Q1
1
X2
ALE
CPU clock
Theory of Operation
External Reset
During a power-up or when an external reset is applied to the RST input, the Crst
capacitor is charged through the two resistors Rrstext and Rrst. The reset is active until
the level applied on the RST pin is below Vih1. The Rsrtext resistor is required when an
internal reset is applied by the microcontroller and will be explained in the next session.
Internal Reset
In some cases, such as a watchdog reset, the microcontroller generates an internal
reset by driving the rstcon signal and consequently by applying a high level on the RST
pin. The pulse duration depends on the product and is typically equal to 96 clock periods
(see the product datasheet).
The Rrstext allows a reset pulse to occur on the RST pin. The reset time constant (several ms) is large in comparison to the reset pulse duration (96 clock periods). In that
condition, Crst maintains its charge (VDD) for all the duration of the reset pulse even if
Rrstwt is active (see Figure 7). VDD is applied across the Rrst and Rrstwt resistors and
expression of Vrst is given below:
Rrstext
Vrst = VDD × ------------------------------------------Rrstext + Rstwt
For a given Rrstwt resistance, Rrstext determines the active level of the reset pin. To
take into account on the external and internal reset constraints, Rrstext must be chosen
in the 1 kΩ and 10 kΩ range.
5
4284A–8051–09/03
Figure 7. Reset Circuitry When an Internal Reset is Applied
VDD
Rrstwt
Internal reset
Vrst
Crst
VDD
Rrstext
Rrst
Vih1
0
0
Without Rrstext no external reset signal will be generated.
Use Excel File to
Determine Crst
To determine Crst, the reset pulse width needs to be calculated using the following
equation:
treset = tvddrise + tosc
•
•
tvddrise (typically 1 ms to 100 ms), is the rise time of the VDD (10% and 90% of the
VDD). It depends on the power supply and the decoupling capacitors used.
tosc (typically 1 ms to 50 ms), time taken by the oscillator at startup. It depends on
the crystal characteristics and the capacitors connected to the crystal.
Because the power supply has a finite transition time (several hundreds of microseconds to several milliseconds), Crst is not so easy to compute by hand. Excel tool is
used to calculate Crst versus tvddrise and tosc parameters. A spreadsheet can be downloaded from the Atmel Web site to compute Crst.
Four parameters have to be entered and Crst is directly computed by the spreadsheet
while 1kΩ is chosen for Rrst. Here is how to do it:
• VDD, the power supply voltage, is entered in the cell F3
• tvddrise, the rise time of the power-supply, is entered in the cell F4
• tosc, the oscillator startup time, is entered in cell F8
• Rrstmin, the minimum pull-down resistor, is entered in the cell F13
After these steps, the cell E31 has to be clicked to compute the Crst and the minimum
reset pulse width.
6
4284A–8051–09/03
Table 2. Excel Spreadsheet Use to Calculate Crst
Power Supply Characteristics
VDD =
5
V
tvddrs =
1
ms
tosct =
10
ms
Rrstmin =
100
kΩ
trstmin =
22, 726
ms
Minimum reset pulse width
Trst =
65, 545
ms
Value of reset capacitor C
C=
0.649
µF
Power Supply Voltage
Power Supply Rise Time (10% to 90%)
Oscillator
Oscillator Startup Time time, measured at VIH1
Electrical Characteristics of the Reset Input
Minimum pull-down resistance
Minimum Pulse Width
Calculation of the reset pulse width
Evaluation of Reset Capacitor: C
Table 3 gives the Crst value computed from the Excel file for different values of tvddrise
and tosc parameters.
Table 3. Minimum Reset Capacitor Value for a 50kΩ Pull-down Resistor (Rrstmin)
tvddrise
tosc
1 ms
10 ms
100 ms
5 ms
820 nF
1.2 µF
12 µF
20 ms
2.7 µF
3.9 µF
12 µF
Table 4. Minimum Reset Capacitor Value for a 100KΩ Pull-down Resistor
tvddrise
tosc
1 ms
10 ms
100 ms
5 ms
390 nF
0.56 µF
5.6 µF
20 ms
1.2 µF
2 µF
5.6 µF
7
4284A–8051–09/03
Atmel Corporation
San Jose, CA 95131, USA
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311
Fax: 1(408) 487-2600
Regional Headquarters
Europe
Atmel Sarl
Route des Arsenaux 41
Case Postale 80
CH-1705 Fribourg
Switzerland
Tel: (41) 26-426-5555
Fax: (41) 26-426-5500
Asia
Room 1219
Chinachem Golden Plaza
77 Mody Road Tsimshatsui
East Kowloon
Hong Kong
Tel: (852) 2721-9778
Fax: (852) 2722-1369
Japan
9F, Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg.
1-24-8 Shinkawa
Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033
Japan
Tel: (81) 3-3523-3551
Fax: (81) 3-3523-7581
Atmel Operations
Memory
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311
Fax: 1(408) 436-4314
Microcontrollers
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311
Fax: 1(408) 436-4314
La Chantrerie
BP 70602
44306 Nantes Cedex 3, France
Tel: (33) 2-40-18-18-18
Fax: (33) 2-40-18-19-60
ASIC/ASSP/Smart Cards
Zone Industrielle
13106 Rousset Cedex, France
Tel: (33) 4-42-53-60-00
Fax: (33) 4-42-53-60-01
RF/Automotive
Theresienstrasse 2
Postfach 3535
74025 Heilbronn, Germany
Tel: (49) 71-31-67-0
Fax: (49) 71-31-67-2340
1150 East Cheyenne Mtn. Blvd.
Colorado Springs, CO 80906, USA
Tel: 1(719) 576-3300
Fax: 1(719) 540-1759
Biometrics/Imaging/Hi-Rel MPU/
High Speed Converters/RF Datacom
Avenue de Rochepleine
BP 123
38521 Saint-Egreve Cedex, France
Tel: (33) 4-76-58-30-00
Fax: (33) 4-76-58-34-80
1150 East Cheyenne Mtn. Blvd.
Colorado Springs, CO 80906, USA
Tel: 1(719) 576-3300
Fax: 1(719) 540-1759
Scottish Enterprise Technology Park
Maxwell Building
East Kilbride G75 0QR, Scotland
Tel: (44) 1355-803-000
Fax: (44) 1355-242-743
Literature Requests
www.atmel.com/literature
Disclaimer: Atmel Corporation makes no warranty for the use of its products, other than those expressly contained in the Company’s standard
warranty which is detailed in Atmel’s Terms and Conditions located on the Company’s web site. The Company assumes no responsibility for any
errors which may appear in this document, reserves the right to change devices or specifications detailed herein at any time without notice, and
does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. No licenses to patents or other intellectual property of Atmel are
granted by the Company in connection with the sale of Atmel products, expressly or by implication. Atmel’s products are not authorized for use
as critical components in life support devices or systems.
© Atmel Corporation 2003. All rights reserved. Atmel ® and combinations thereof are the registered trademarks of Atmel Corporation or its
subsidiaries. Other terms and product names may be the trademarks of others.
Printed on recycled paper.
4284A–8051–09/03
ANEXO D - In-System Flash Programming para
microcontroladores da família 8051
ANM076
C51 In-System FLASH Programming
1. Introduction
Most C51 microcontroller based applications using an on-board FLASH memory for code and data storage take
the advantage of being In-System Programmabled thanks to the FLASH technology. This application note describes
the basic hardware and software requirements to build such a system based on a C51 product (or C251 product
configured for C51 memory model). Basic In-System Programming features described in this document are: FLASH
identifying, erasing and programming from a HEX file.
The C51/C251 Demo Board demonstrates this In-System Programming implementation using an Atmel AT49HF010
FLASH memory.
2. Description
2.1. System Requirements
The In-System FLASH Programming (ISP) described in this document assumes a typical C51 configuration shown
in Figure 1.
UART
FLASH
Program
Memory
Data Bus
C51
SRAM
Data
Memory
Addr Bus
Control
ISP
Control
Glue
Figure 1. Typical C51 Configuration
The basic system includes a C51, a FLASH memory for code and a SRAM for data. The C51 interfaces the
memory devices through some ISP dedicated glue to allow the C51 to write into the FLASH as if it would be a
SRAM. The C51 is also connected to a terminal via a RS-232 serial link using its embedded UART. This terminal
will be used to download a new program into the FLASH memory.
2.2. Memory Mapping
C51 microcontrollers have several memory space areas:
•
•
•
•
•
The
The
The
The
The
internal data memory
internal Special Function Register (SFR) memory to address on-chip resources
optional expanded on-chip data memory (on-chip XRAM)
external program memory
external data memory
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
1
ANM076
2.2.1. Standard Program Execution Mode
FFFF
Upper
Optional
Internal RAM
FFFF
External
Data
Memory
FF
Special
Function
Register
direct accesses
External
Program
Memory
80
00
FLASH
device
SRAM
device
Lower
128 bytes
Internal
Ram
direct or indirect
accesses
On-Chip
Program
Memory
Optional
on-chip XRAM
0000
(Disabled)
0000
0000
0000
Figure 2. C51 Memory Mapping in Standard Mode
When the application is running (standard mode), the SRAM is used for application data storage and the FLASH
memory for code and constant data storage. Data in SRAM are accessed thanks to the MOVX instruction and
constant data are retrieved from the FLASH memory thanks to the MOVC.
2.2.2. ISP Program Execution Mode
FFFF
Upper
Optional
Internal RAM
FF
Special
Function
Register
direct accesses
FFFF
External
Data
Memory
External
Program
Memory
FLASH
device
SRAM
device
80
Lower
128 bytes
Internal
Ram
direct or indirect
accesses
00
On-Chip
Program
Memory
Optional
on-chip XRAM
0000
(ISP Program)
0000
0000
0000
Figure 3. C51 Memory Mapping in ISP Mode
In ISP mode, the FLASH memory is re-mapped in the data space area so that a new program can be writen using
data write instructions (MOVX). In this mode, the FLASH memory is no longer available for program execution
and the ISP program must carried out from the on-chip program memory. Because the C51 microcontroller has a
Harward architecture (separate memory data/code address spaces) the FLASH memory can be easily re-mapped
into the data space providing a simple logic glue and few control signals.
Some C51 derivatives provide an extra on-chip data memory area called on-chip XRAM. This area is overlaid
with the external data memory accessed using MOVX instructions. In ISP mode, this on-chip XRAM must be
disabled otherwise MOVX instruction would not access to a part of the FLASH memory but to the on-chip XRAM
area.
2
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
ANM076
2.2.3. Special Considerations
In order to simplify the discussion, it is assumed there is no need to store application routines in the on-chip
memory and the C51 would behave as a ROMless version:
• In standard mode, the microcontroller would reset with EA#=0 and the application would start from address
•
0000h located in FLASH memory
In ISP mode, the microcontroller would reset with EA#=1 and the ISP program would start from address 0000h
in the on-chip ROM/EPROM or FLASH memory depending on the part.
However some applications may require to store some extra routines in the on-chip memory for several reasons
like cost reduction using the same ROM version on many different applications, crypted ROM routines for secured
applications, auto-configuring application with on-chip FLASH program memory... In this latter case, some room
must be left for the ISP subroutines and the microcontroller would always reset with EA#=1. To help the reset
service routine to determine whether the application is in standard mode or ISP mode, an extra signal should be
provided by the application. Note that a special care should be taken for the interrupt routine design since some
interrupts vectors may be shared between the ISP program and the application.
3. Hardware
Figure 4 shows the typical hardware configuration for an application providing the In-System FLASH Programming
feature. The ISP input signal configures the system in Standard Mode or in In-System Programming Mode.
ALE
P0AD7:0
SRAM MEMORY
A7:0
573
D7:0
RXD
TXD
RS232
Interface
P3.0/RxD
A15:8
P2/A15:8
P3.1/TxD
P3.7/RD#
WR
RD
PSEN
OE
P3.6/WR#
EA#
FLASH MEMORY
ISP
A7:0
D7:0
A15:8
WR
RD
OE
VSS
Figure 4. In-System Programming Hardware Configuration
When ISP is high, the standard mode is selected. After reset, the program branches at address 0000h which is
located in the on-board FLASH memory (EA#=0).
When ISP is low, the ISP mode is selected. After reset, the program branches to address 0000h located in the onchip memory and executes the ISP program.
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
3
ANM076
The ISP also controls the FLASH / SRAM memory address area swap. The decoding equations for memory control
signals are shown in Table 1. The glue logic that controls the memory signals may be programmed in a PLD
(Programmable Logic Device).
Table 1. Equations for Memory Control
Operating Mode
FLASH Memory
SRAM Memory
ISP = 0
(In-System Programming Mode)
-
RD = PSEN & RD#
WR = WR
-
RD = RD#
WR = WR
OE = 1
ISP = 1
(Standard Mode)
-
RD = PSEN
WR = 1
-
RD = X
WR = X
OE = 0
4. Software
The software in charge of the ISP is splitted into three parts: the IO interface, the Intel HEX file parser and the
FLASH programming.
4.1. Operation
The ISP program performs the following tasks:
• Atmel FLASH authentification (AT49HF010)
• FLASH chip erase
• Download the HEX file and program data to the FLASH
For demonstration purpose, the host terminal displays the following messages during the ISP averall process:
** Welcome to the ISP program! **
Check if FLASH device is a Atmel AT49HF010... OK.
Erasing the on-board FLASH memory... OK.
Ready for FLASH programming.
Send .hex file with the following terminal configuration:
- ASCII character transmission,
- 8 bits, 1 stop, parity none,
- XON-XOFF flow control.
Waiting for download...
........................................................
........................................................
........................................
External FLASH memory is now programmed.
4.2. IO Interface
The HEX file is downloaded from a host via the standard C51 UART using a full-duplex communication protocol
with a XON/XOFF data flow control. The program assumes a host as a simple terminal emulator that can display
messages and download ASCII files.
The UART routines implement one circular buffer dedicated to the character reception. An interrupt service routine
is in charge of the character reception so that FLASH programming can occur while receiving characters from the host.
• UART Reception
4
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
ANM076
•
Upon reception of a character, the UART interrupt routine stores the received byte in the Rx circular buffer.
As soon as the ISP program detects the Rx buffer is not empty, newly received characters are read from this
buffer and are processed by the HEX file decoder. As soon as the Rx buffer is almost full, an XOFF character
is automatically transmitted to indicate the terminal that reception shall stop. When a sufficient number of
characters have been read and the Rx buffer is almost empty, an XON character is sent to the terminal to
resume the transmission.
UART Transmission
Some simple messages are sent to the host for demonstration purpose. They are sent to the UART using the
printf function provided by the Keil Development Kit [5]. This printf function is based on a putchar
function that handles the XON/XOFF flow control.
4.3. Intel HEX File Parser
The Intel HEX file is a standard file format for binary program code encoding using ASCII characters (see [3]).
Basically, the Intel HEX file contains records. Each record is made of the following items:
•
•
•
•
Record length: number of bytes in the record
Record type: describes the information contained in the record (data, end of file, segment address, ...)
Address field: indicated where the following bytes are stored in the memory
Checksum
To minimize the data storage volume, the HEX file parser function analyses on a per byte basis each record. The
HEX decoder decodes each record fields and extracts the address offset and the actual bytes that need to be
programmed to the FLASH memory.
The parser structure is based on state machine shown in Figure 5.
Since the HEX file transmitted by the host encodes hexadecimal byte in ASCII form, the HEX decoder function
must convert ASCII digits into binary format before processing. This conversion is made over 2 or 4 ASCII digits
according to the record field (addresses are 4-digit numbers, data are 2-digit numbers).
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
5
ANM076
Record Mark
Wait for ’:’
Get record
length 2 digits
(MSB & LSB)
Get Address
Offset 4 digits
Get Record type
2 digits
Check if still data
to read in the
record
Get data 2 digits
&
FLASH
programming
Final checksum
computation
Checksum Error
Checksum OK ?
Flash Programmed
Figure 5. HEX File Decoder State Machine
4.4. FLASH Programming
A FLASH memory controller provides the user several write and erase operations like byte write, page write, page
erase etc... The FLASH programming software routines implemented here provide the erasing of the whole FLASH
memory array and the writing of one byte.
The FLASH memory controller handshaking required for an erase or write operation are detailled in [4]. The two
basic sequences are shown Figure 6 and Figure 7.
6
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
ANM076
4.4.1. Chip Erase
The Chip Erase command consists of a 6 cycle sequence. Upon reception of the command, the FLASH memory
starts its erasure process. While erasure process is on-going, the bit 6 of the FLASH databus toggles each time a
memory location is accessed. As soon as this bit stops flipping when accessed, the erasing operation is over.
Erase command
Write AAh @ 5555h
Write 55h @ 2AAAh
Write 80h @ 5555h
Write AAh @ 5555h
Write 55h @ 2AAAh
Write 10h @ 5555h
Read @ 5555h
Checks bit IO6
toggles?
End of Erase Sequence
Figure 6. FLASH Erase Sequence
4.4.2. Byte Programming
The Byte Programming command consists of a 4 cycle sequence. Upon reception of the command, the FLASH
memory waits for the data write sequence and starts its programming process. While programming process is ongoing, the bit 7 of the FLASH databus is inverted each time the memory location is accessed. As soon as the
correct data is read from the last programmed FLASH memory location, the programming operation is over.
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
7
ANM076
Write command
Write AAh @ 5555h
Write 55h @ 2AAAh
Write A0h @ 5555h
Write data @ addr
Read data @ addr
Bit 7 of data
negated?
End of Byte Programming
Figure 7. FLASH Write Sequence
5. Bibliography
[1] C51 Product Datasheets (Atmel Wireless & Microcontrollers)
[2] TSC80251G1 Design Guide ((Atmel Wireless & Microcontrollers)
[3] Hexdecimal Object File Format Specification (Intel)
[4] AT49HF010 FLASH Memory Datasheet (Atmel)
[5] Keil C51 C Compiler Manual
6. Sites to Visit
Atmel Wireless & Microcontrollers Web site: http://www.atmel-wm.com.com
8
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
ANM076
7. Appendix A: Software
7.1. MAIN.C
/*C**************************************************************************
* NAME: main.c
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Main entry for ISP program and system initialization.
* Main entry includes all the ISP sequence from FLASH erase to FLASH prog.
*****************************************************************************/
/*_____ I N C L U D E S ____________________________________________________*/
#include <stdio.h>
#include "config.h"
#include "isp.h"
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: _DEAD_
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* When a fatal error occurs, this function is called to end with a standard
* error message and a never end loop.
*****************************************************************************/
void _DEAD_(void)
{
printf("\nError: cannot continue!\n");
while (1);
}
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: system_init
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Initializes the microcontroller: XRAM disabled to enable the FLASH mapping
* into the data space and uart settings.
*****************************************************************************/
void system_init(void)
{
/* Disable on-chip XRAM if exists */
#ifdef HAVE_XRAM
AUXR = NO_XDATA;
#endif
/* Initialize communication port */
uart_init();
EA = 1;
}
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: main
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Program main entry. Manages the basic ISP sequence flow from FLASH ersure
* to FLASH programming.
*****************************************************************************/
void main(void)
{
Uchar status;
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
9
ANM076
/* System initialization: IO, welcome message, ... */
system_init();
printf("\n\n** Welcome to the ISP program! **\n\n");
/* Check the Flash manufacturer and device Id (Atmel=1F, 49HF010=17) */
printf("Check if FLASH device is a Atmel AT49HF010... ");
if (flash_id()==0x1F17)
{
printf("OK.\n");
}
else
{
printf("KO!\n");
_DEAD_();
}
/* On-board FLASH erase operation */
printf("\nErasing the on-board FLASH memory... ");
flash_erase();
printf("OK.\n\n");
/* FLASH erased: ready for programming */
printf("Ready for FLASH programming.\n");
printf("Send .hex file with the following terminal configuration:\n");
printf(" - ASCII character transmission,\n");
printf(" - 8 bits, 1 stop, parity none,\n"),
printf(" - XON-XOFF flow control.\n");
printf("\nWaiting for download...\n");
/* Parses the downloaded HEX file and program the on-board FLASH memory */
uart_rx_enable();
status = hex_parser();
uart_rx_disable();
if (status == HEX_DEC_CSERR)
{
printf("\nChecksum error: external FLASH memory is not programmed!\n");
_DEAD_();
}
else
printf("\nExternal FLASH memory is now programmed.\n");
/* Happy end! */
while(1);
}
10
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
ANM076
7.2. IO.C
/*C**************************************************************************
* NAME: io.c
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Functions dedicated to the HEX file reception from the host via the Uart.
* These functions provide uart initialization, interrupt handling and
* Rx circular buffer management.
*****************************************************************************/
/*_____ I N C L U D E S ____________________________________________________*/
#include "compiler.h"
#include "config.h"
#include "isp.h"
/*_____ M A C R O S ________________________________________________________*/
/* XON / XOFF Contro characters */
#define XON
17
#define XOFF
19
/* Must be 2^y for modulo computation */
#define RX_BUF_SIZE 16
/* XOFF when only 50% buffer size left */
/* XON when 25% rx buffer full */
#define XOFF_THRESH (RX_BUF_SIZE - (RX_BUF_SIZE / 2) )
#define XON_THRESH (RX_BUF_SIZE / 4)
/* Wait for end of Tx over the Uart */
#define WAIT_EO_TX {while (TI==0); TI=0;}
/*_____ D E F I N I T I O N ________________________________________________*/
static Uchar rx_buffer[RX_BUF_SIZE]; /* Rx circular buffer */
static Uchar rx_index_wr;
/* Rx circular buffer indexes */
static Uchar rx_index_rd;
static Bool tx_off;
/* XOFF state indicator */
Uchar nb_rx_data;
/* Number of data in the Rx buffer */
/*_____ D E C L A R A T I O N ______________________________________________*/
void rx_buffer_wr(Uchar rx_data);
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: uart
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Uart interrupt handler: processes Rx uart events only.
*****************************************************************************/
Interrupt(void uart(void),4)
{
if (RI == 1)
/* Processes Rx event only, not Tx */
{
rx_buffer_wr(SBUF);
/* Writes the received data into the Rx buffer */
RI = 0;
}
}
/*F**************************************************************************
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
11
ANM076
* NAME: uart_tx
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Send a character over the serial link. Exit when the character
* transmission is over.
*****************************************************************************/
void uart_tx(Uchar tx_data)
{
SBUF = tx_data;
WAIT_EO_TX;
}
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: uart_init
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Set the C51 Uart in 8-bit data, 9600 bauds, no parity operating mode.
*****************************************************************************/
void uart_init(void)
{
SCON = 0x50;
TMOD = TMOD | 0x20 ;
/* Timer1 in mode 2 & not gated */
TH1 = 0xFD;
/* 9600 bauds at 11.059200 MHZ */
TL1 = 0xFD;
PCON = PCON & 0X80;
TCON |= 0x40;
TI=1;
}
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: uart_rx_enable
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Initializes Uart for data reception: circular buffer reset, XON/XOFF
* protocol initialization and interrupt enabled.
*****************************************************************************/
void uart_rx_enable(void)
{
rx_index_wr = rx_index_rd = nb_rx_data = 0;
WAIT_EO_TX;
/* Wait any previous transmission (printf) */
uart_tx(XON);
ES = 1;
}
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: uart_rx_disable
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Disable Rx reception upon interrupts.
*****************************************************************************/
void uart_rx_disable(void)
{
ES = 0;
TI = 1;
/* Enable Tx for printf (polling) */
}
/*F**************************************************************************
12
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
ANM076
* NAME: rx_buffer_empty
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PARAMS:
* return: TRUE when Rx buffer is empty.
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Check if new Rx data have been stored in the Rx buffer.
*****************************************************************************/
Bool rx_buffer_empty(void)
{
if (nb_rx_data == 0)
return TRUE;
else
return FALSE;
}
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: rx_buffer_wr
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PARAMS:
* rx_data: Rx data to store in the buffer.
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Stores the newly received data in the buffer and keep indexes updated.
*****************************************************************************/
void rx_buffer_wr(Uchar rx_data)
{
nb_rx_data++;
rx_buffer[rx_index_wr] = rx_data;
/* Circular buffer index computation */
rx_index_wr = (rx_index_wr + 1) % RX_BUF_SIZE;
/* Stops host transmission when more than XOFF_THRES characters are stored
* in the Rx buffer */
if ((tx_off==FALSE) && (nb_rx_data > XOFF_THRESH))
{
uart_tx(XOFF);
tx_off = TRUE;
}
}
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: rx_buffer_rd
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PARAMS:
* return: the next data available from the Rx buffer.
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Retrieve the next data from the RX buffer.
*****************************************************************************
* NOTE:
* All interrupts are disabled when updating rx_data because a Rx interrupt
* may occur and disturb the computation (rx_data also updated in the Uart
* interrupt handler.
*****************************************************************************/
Uchar rx_buffer_rd(void)
{
static Uchar data_cnt=0;
/* For progression dots */
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
13
ANM076
Uchar rx_data;
EA=0;
nb_rx_data--;
EA=1;
/* Avoid conflicts with rx_buffer_wr() */
rx_data = rx_buffer[rx_index_rd];
/* Circular buffer index computation */
rx_index_rd = (rx_index_rd + 1) % RX_BUF_SIZE;
/* Progression dots every 256 data */
data_cnt++;
if (data_cnt == 0)
uart_tx('.');
/* Resumes host transmission when less than XON_THRES characters are stored
* in the Rx buffer */
EA = 0;
if ((tx_off == TRUE) && (nb_rx_data < XON_THRESH))
{
uart_tx(XON);
tx_off = FALSE;
}
EA = 1;
return(rx_data);
}
14
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
ANM076
7.3. FLASH.C
/*C**************************************************************************
* NAME: flash.c
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
*****************************************************************************/
/*_____ I N C L U D E S ____________________________________________________*/
#include "config.h"
#include "isp.h"
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: flash_wr
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PARAMS:
* addr: FLASH address location mapped in the external data area
* val: Data value to write to the FLASH.
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Writes a byte to the FLASH memory when located in the external data area.
*****************************************************************************/
void flash_wr(Uchar xdata *addr, Uchar val)
{
*addr = val;
/* addr is a pointer to external data mem */
}
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: flash_rd
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PARAMS:
* return: Byte value read from the FLASH memory
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Reads a byte from the FLASH memory when located in the external data area.
*****************************************************************************/
Uchar flash_rd(Uchar xdata *addr)
{
return *addr;
}
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: flash_cmd
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PARAMS:
* cmd: FLASH command used by the FLASH command sequence
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Performs a FLASH command sequence (on-FLASH memory controller configuration)
* The command is defined by the cmd code (erase, chip-id access, ...)
*****************************************************************************/
void flash_cmd(Uchar cmd)
{
flash_wr(0x5555, 0xAA);
flash_wr(0x2AAA, 0x55);
flash_wr(0x5555, cmd);
}
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
15
ANM076
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: flash_erase
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Erases the entire FLASH memory.
*****************************************************************************/
void flash_erase(void)
{
Uchar pol_n, pol_n_1;
/* Erase command sequence */
flash_cmd(0x80);
flash_cmd(0x10);
/* Toggle
/* End of
pol_n_1 =
pol_n
=
bit algorithm: IO6 toggles each time a data read occurs */
toggoling signals end of erase */
flash_rd(0x5555);
flash_rd(0x5555);
while ((pol_n ^ pol_n_1) == 0x40) /* Checks if bit6 has changed between
2 polls */
{
pol_n_1 = pol_n;
pol_n
= flash_rd(0x5555);
}
}
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: flash_prog
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PARAMS:
* val: Data value to program to the FLASH.
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Programs one byte to the FLASH memory.
*****************************************************************************/
void flash_prog(Uint16 addr, Uchar value)
{
/* Programming command */
flash_cmd(0xA0);
flash_wr(addr, value);
/* Wait until end of programming: IO7 is negated until end of programming */
while (flash_rd(addr) != value);
}
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: flash_id
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PARAMS:
* return: FLASH memory manufacturer id and device id bytes.
*
MSB is Manufacturer Id and LSB Device Id.
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Read the manufactuer and device Id's.
*****************************************************************************/
Uint16 flash_id()
16
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
ANM076
{
Uint16 flash_id=0;
/* Product Id Entry mode */
flash_cmd(0x90);
/* @0000: manufacturer, @0001: device */
flash_id = flash_rd(0x0000) << 8 | flash_rd(0x0001);
/* Exit from Product Id */
flash_cmd(0xF0);
return flash_id;
}
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
17
ANM076
7.4. HEX.C
/*C**************************************************************************
* NAME: hex.c
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* HEX file decoder: extracts HEX file information, retrieve data and program
* the FLASH memory on the fly.
*****************************************************************************/
/*_____ I N C L U D E S ____________________________________________________*/
#include "config.h"
#include "isp.h"
#include <ctype.h>
/*_____ M A C R O S
/* State definition
#define REC_MARK
#define REC_LEN_1
#define REC_LEN_2
#define OFFSET_1
#define OFFSET_2
#define OFFSET_3
#define OFFSET_4
#define REC_TYP_1
#define REC_TYP_2
#define DATA_1
#define DATA_2
#define CHEKSUM_1
#define CHEKSUM_2
________________________________________________________*/
of the HEX file decoder state machine */
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x0D
/*_____ D E C L A R A T I O N ______________________________________________*/
Uchar hex_decoder(Uchar hex_data);
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: hex_parser
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PARAMS:
* return: Exit status of the HEX file parser: OK or bad CRC encountered.
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Monitors the HEX file Rx buffer and call the HEX decoder as soon as data
* are available.
*****************************************************************************/
Uchar hex_parser(void)
{
Uchar hex_data, status;
status = HEX_DEC_OK;
while (status == HEX_DEC_OK) /* Processes while hex decoder status is OK */
{
if(nb_rx_data != 0)
{
hex_data = rx_buffer_rd();
status = hex_decoder(hex_data);
}
}
return status;
18
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
ANM076
}
/*F**************************************************************************
* NAME: hex_decoder
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PARAMS:
* hex_data: data from the HEX file to decode
* return: Hex decoder exit status: OK or bad CRC encountered.
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Decodes all HEX file records on a byte per byte basis: analyse HEX record,
* extracts data for FLASH programming and verifies the checksum.
*****************************************************************************
* NOTE:
* HEX data are ASCII data format. Each byte is made of 2 ASCII form digits
* that needed to be converted. Conversion uses toint which is not a ANSI
* C function. One should use strtol when available (not in Keil C lib).
*****************************************************************************/
Uchar hex_decoder(Uchar hex_data)
{
static state = REC_MARK;
static Uchar length, type, nb_byte, data_value, sum, sum_1, sum_2;
static Uint16 offset;
Uchar status;
status = HEX_DEC_OK;
switch(state)
{
case REC_MARK:
{
if (hex_data == ':')
{
state = REC_LEN_1;
nb_byte=0;
}
else
state = REC_MARK;
break;
}
/* Start of a new record */
/* Check if the right character */
/* If ok, next step: get the 1st lenght char */
/* If ko, spurious char and skip */
case REC_LEN_1:
/* Get the 1st digit of the length byte */
{
length = toint(hex_data) * 16;
state = REC_LEN_2;
break;
}
case REC_LEN_2:
/* Get the 2nd digit of the lenght byte */
{
length = length + toint(hex_data);
state = OFFSET_1;
break;
}
case OFFSET_1:
/* Get the 1st digit of the adress byte */
{
offset = toint(hex_data) * 4096;
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
19
ANM076
state = OFFSET_2;
break;
}
case OFFSET_2:
/* Get the 2nd digit of the adress byte */
{
offset = offset + toint(hex_data) * 256;
sum_1= offset / 256;
state = OFFSET_3;
break;
}
case OFFSET_3:
/* Get the 3rd digit of the adress byte */
{
offset = offset + toint(hex_data) * 16;
state = OFFSET_4;
break;
}
case OFFSET_4:
/* Get the 4th digit of the adress byte */
{
offset = offset + toint(hex_data);
sum_2 = offset - sum_1 * 256;
state = REC_TYP_1;
break;
}
case REC_TYP_1:
/* Get the 1st digit of the record type */
{
type = toint(hex_data) * 16;
state =REC_TYP_2;
break;
}
case REC_TYP_2:
/* Get the 2nd digit of the record type */
{
type = type + toint(hex_data);
sum = length + sum_1 + sum_2 + type;
if (length==0x00)
state=CHEKSUM_1;
/* If no data, go to checksum computation */
else
state = DATA_1;
/* Otherwise next is data record acquisition */
break;
}
case DATA_1:
/* Get the 1st digit of one data */
{
data_value = toint(hex_data) * 16 ;
state = DATA_2;
break;
}
case DATA_2:
/* Get the 2nd digit of one data */
{
data_value = data_value + toint(hex_data);
sum = sum + data_value;
flash_prog(offset + nb_byte, data_value);
20
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
ANM076
nb_byte++;
if (nb_byte == length)
state = CHEKSUM_1;
else
state = DATA_1;
break;
/* If end of data block, go to checksum */
/* Otherwise, get the next data in the block */
}
case CHEKSUM_1:
/* Get 1st digit of the checksum */
{
sum_1 = toint(hex_data) * 16;
sum = (~sum) + 1;
/* Checksum 2 complement */
state = CHEKSUM_2;
break;
}
case CHEKSUM_2:
/* Get 2nd digit of the checksum */
{
sum_1 = sum_1 + toint(hex_data);
if (sum_1 != sum)
status = HEX_DEC_CSERR;
state = REC_MARK;
/* Ready for next record */
if(type==0x01)
status = HEX_DEC_END; /* end of transmission */
break;
}
}
return status;
}
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
21
ANM076
7.5. CONFIG.H
/*H***************************************************************************
* NAME: myfile.h
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
*****************************************************************************/
#ifndef _CONFIG_H_
#define _CONFIG_H_
/*_____ I N C L U D E S ____________________________________________________*/
#include <reg51.h>
#include "compiler.h"
/* ______________________ User Configuration Section ______________________ */
#define HAVE_XRAM
/* Target chip: T89C51RD2 with on-chip XRAM */
/* ______________________ User Configuration Section ______________________ */
#ifdef HAVE_XRAM
entire */
#define NO_XDATA 0x02
Sfr (AUXR, 0x8E);
#endif
/* If on-chip XRAM, disable the XRAM to access to the
/* FLASH when mapped in the data area */
#endif /* _CONFIG_H_ */
22
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
ANM076
7.6. COMPILER.H
/*H***************************************************************************
* NAME: compiler.h
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE:
* Defines compiler dependant definitions to enhance program portability.
* Allows to remap exotic syntaxes to another exotic syntaxe without changing
* C source files.
*****************************************************************************/
#ifndef _COMPILER_H_
#define _COMPILER_H_
/*_____ M A C R O S ________________________________________________________*/
#define FALSE 0
#define TRUE
1
/*_____
typedef
typedef
typedef
typedef
typedef
D E F I N I T I
unsigned char
unsigned short
signed int
float
unsigned char
O N ________________________________________________*/
Uchar;
Uint16;
Int16;
Float16;
Bool;
/* KEIL
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
compiler syntax
Reentrant(x)
Sfr(x,y)
Sbit(x,y,z)
Interrupt(x,y)
At(x)
redefinition */
x reentrant
sfr x = y
sbit x = y ^ z
x interrupt y
_at_ x
#endif /* _COMPILER_H_ */
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
23
ANM076
7.7. ISP.H
/*H***************************************************************************
* NAME: isp.h
*---------------------------------------------------------------------------* PURPOSE: Header file shared by all ISP C files.
*****************************************************************************/
#ifndef _ISP_H_
#define _ISP_H_
/* Uart */
extern Uchar nb_rx_data;
void uart_init(void);
void uart_rx_enable(void);
void uart_rx_disable(void);
Bool rx_buffer_empty(void);
Uchar rx_buffer_rd(void);
/* HEX file parser */
#define HEX_DEC_OK
0x01
#define HEX_DEC_END
0x02
#define HEX_DEC_CSERR 0x03
Uchar hex_parser (void);
/* FLASH API's*/
void flash_erase(void);
void flash_prog(Uint16, Uchar value);
Uint16 flash_id(void);
#endif /* _ISP_H_ */
24
Rev A - 21 Jan 2000
ANEXO E - Datasheet do controlador HD44780
HD44780U (LCD-II)
(Dot Matrix Liquid Crystal Display Controller/Driver)
ADE-207-272(Z)
'99.9
Rev. 0.0
Description
The HD44780U dot-matrix liquid crystal display controller and driver LSI displays alphanumerics,
Japanese kana characters, and symbols. It can be configured to drive a dot-matrix liquid crystal display
under the control of a 4- or 8-bit microprocessor. Since all the functions such as display RAM, character
generator, and liquid crystal driver, required for driving a dot-matrix liquid crystal display are internally
provided on one chip, a minimal system can be interfaced with this controller/driver.
A single HD44780U can display up to one 8-character line or two 8-character lines.
The HD44780U has pin function compatibility with the HD44780S which allows the user to easily replace
an LCD-II with an HD44780U. The HD44780U character generator ROM is extended to generate 208 5 ×
8 dot character fonts and 32 5 × 10 dot character fonts for a total of 240 different character fonts.
The low power supply (2.7V to 5.5V) of the HD44780U is suitable for any portable battery-driven product
requiring low power dissipation.
Features
• 5 × 8 and 5 × 10 dot matrix possible
• Low power operation support:
 2.7 to 5.5V
• Wide range of liquid crystal display driver power
 3.0 to 11V
• Liquid crystal drive waveform
 A (One line frequency AC waveform)
• Correspond to high speed MPU bus interface
 2 MHz (when VCC = 5V)
• 4-bit or 8-bit MPU interface enabled
• 80 × 8-bit display RAM (80 characters max.)
• 9,920-bit character generator ROM for a total of 240 character fonts
 208 character fonts (5 × 8 dot)
1
HD44780U
• 64 × 8-bit character generator RAM
• 16-common × 40-segment liquid crystal display driver
• Programmable duty cycles
 1/8 for one line of 5 × 8 dots with cursor
 1/11 for one line of 5 × 10 dots with cursor
 1/16 for two lines of 5 × 8 dots with cursor
• Wide range of instruction functions:
 Display clear, cursor home, display on/off, cursor on/off, display character blink, cursor shift,
display shift
• Pin function compatibility with HD44780S
• Automatic reset circuit that initializes the controller/driver after power on
• Internal oscillator with external resistors
• Low power consumption
Ordering Information
Type No.
Package
CGROM
HD44780UA00FS
HCD44780UA00
HD44780UA00TF
HD44780UA02FS
HCD44780UA02
HD44780UA02TF
FP-80B
Chip
TFP-80F
FP-80B
Chip
TFP-80F
Japanese standard font
HD44780UBxxFS
HCD44780UBxx
HD44780UBxxTF
FP-80B
Chip
TFP-80F
Custom font
Note: xx: ROM code No.
2
European standard font
HD44780U
HD44780U Block Diagram
OSC1 OSC2
M
Reset
circuit
ACL
Timing
generator
CPG
8
RS
R/W
E
Instruction
register (IR)
7
Address
counter
DB0 to
DB3
7
8
40-bit
shift
register
8
7
DB4 to
DB7
D
Display
data RAM
(DDRAM)
80 × 8 bits
Instruction
decoder
MPU
interface
Input/
output
buffer
CL1
CL2
16-bit
shift
register
Common
signal
driver
40-bit
latch
circuit
Segment
signal
driver
SEG1 to
SEG40
7
Data
register
(DR)
8
40
8
8
LCD drive
voltage
selector
Busy
flag
GND
COM1 to
COM16
Character
generator
ROM
(CGROM)
9,920 bits
Character
generator
RAM
(CGRAM)
64 bytes
5
Cursor
and
blink
controller
5
Parallel/serial converter
and
attribute circuit
VCC
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
3
HD44780U
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
1
64
2
63
3
62
4
61
5
60
6
59
7
58
8
57
9
56
10
55
11
54
FP-80B
(Top view)
12
13
53
52
42
24
41
OSC2
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
CL1
CL2
VCC
M
D
RS
R/W
E
DB0
DB1
40
23
39
43
38
44
22
37
21
36
45
35
46
20
34
19
33
47
32
48
18
31
17
30
49
29
50
16
28
15
27
51
26
14
25
SEG22
SEG21
SEG20
SEG19
SEG18
SEG17
SEG16
SEG15
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
SEG10
SEG9
SEG8
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
GND
OSC1
79
80
SEG23
SEG24
SEG25
SEG26
SEG27
SEG28
SEG29
SEG30
SEG31
SEG32
SEG33
SEG34
SEG35
SEG36
SEG37
SEG38
HD44780U Pin Arrangement (FP-80B)
4
SEG39
SEG40
COM16
COM15
COM14
COM13
COM12
COM11
COM10
COM9
COM8
COM7
COM6
COM5
COM4
COM3
COM2
COM1
DB7
DB6
DB5
DB4
DB3
DB2
HD44780U
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
1
60
2
59
3
58
4
57
5
56
6
55
7
54
8
53
9
52
TFP-80F
(Top view)
10
11
51
50
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
41
33
20
32
42
31
43
19
30
18
29
44
28
45
17
27
16
26
46
25
47
15
24
14
23
48
22
49
13
21
12
COM16
COM15
COM14
COM13
COM12
COM11
COM10
COM9
COM8
COM7
COM6
COM5
COM4
COM3
COM2
COM1
DB7
DB6
DB5
DB4
GND
OSC1
OSC2
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
CL1
CL2
VCC
M
D
RS
R/W
E
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
SEG20
SEG19
SEG18
SEG17
SEG16
SEG15
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
SEG10
SEG9
SEG8
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
79
80
SEG21
SEG22
SEG23
SEG24
SEG25
SEG26
SEG27
SEG28
SEG29
SEG30
SEG31
SEG32
SEG33
SEG34
SEG35
SEG36
SEG37
SEG38
SEG39
SEG40
HD44780U Pin Arrangement (TFP-80F)
5
HD44780U
HD44780U Pad Arrangement
Chip size:
4.90 × 4.90 mm2
Coordinate: Pad center (µm)
2
1
Origin:
Chip center
Pad size:
114 × 114 µm2
80
63
Y
Type code
HD44780U
42
23
X
6
HD44780U
HCD44780U Pad Location Coordinates
Pad No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Function
SEG22
SEG21
SEG20
SEG19
SEG18
SEG17
SEG16
SEG15
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
SEG10
SEG9
SEG8
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
GND
OSC1
OSC2
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
CL1
CL2
VCC
M
D
RS
R/W
E
DB0
DB1
Coordinate
X (um)
Y (um)
–2100
2313
–2280
2313
–2313
2089
–2313
1833
–2313
1617
–2313
1401
–2313
1186
–2313
970
–2313
755
–2313
539
–2313
323
–2313
108
–2313
–108
–2313
–323
–2313
–539
–2313
–755
–2313
–970
–2313
–1186
–2313
–1401
–2313
–1617
–2313
–1833
–2313
–2073
–2280
–2290
–2080
–2290
–1749
–2290
–1550
–2290
–1268
–2290
–941
–2290
–623
–2290
–304
–2290
–48
–2290
142
–2290
309
–2290
475
–2290
665
–2290
832
–2290
1022
–2290
1204
–2290
1454
–2290
1684
–2290
Pad No.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Function
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
COM1
COM2
COM3
COM4
COM5
COM6
COM7
COM8
COM9
COM10
COM11
COM12
COM13
COM14
COM15
COM16
SEG40
SEG39
SEG38
SEG37
SEG36
SEG35
SEG34
SEG33
SEG32
SEG31
SEG30
SEG29
SEG28
SEG27
SEG26
SEG25
SEG24
SEG23
Coordinate
X (um)
Y (um)
2070
–2290
2260
–2290
2290
–2099
2290
–1883
2290
–1667
2290
–1452
2313
–1186
2313
–970
2313
–755
2313
–539
2313
–323
2313
–108
2313
108
2313
323
2313
539
2313
755
2313
970
2313
1186
2313
1401
2313
1617
2313
1833
2313
2095
2296
2313
2100
2313
1617
2313
1401
2313
1186
2313
970
2313
755
2313
539
2313
323
2313
108
2313
–108
2313
–323
2313
–539
2313
–755
2313
–970
2313
–1186
2313
–1401
2313
–1617
2313
7
HD44780U
Pin Functions
Signal
No. of
Lines
I/O
Device
Interfaced with
RS
1
I
MPU
Selects registers.
0: Instruction register (for write) Busy flag:
address counter (for read)
1: Data register (for write and read)
R/W
1
I
MPU
Selects read or write.
0: Write
1: Read
E
1
I
MPU
Starts data read/write.
DB4 to DB7
4
I/O
MPU
Four high order bidirectional tristate data bus
pins. Used for data transfer and receive between
the MPU and the HD44780U. DB7 can be used
as a busy flag.
DB0 to DB3
4
I/O
MPU
Four low order bidirectional tristate data bus pins.
Used for data transfer and receive between the
MPU and the HD44780U.
These pins are not used during 4-bit operation.
CL1
1
O
Extension driver
Clock to latch serial data D sent to the extension
driver
CL2
1
O
Extension driver
Clock to shift serial data D
M
1
O
Extension driver
Switch signal for converting the liquid crystal
drive waveform to AC
D
1
O
Extension driver
Character pattern data corresponding to each
segment signal
COM1 to COM16 16
O
LCD
Common signals that are not used are changed
to non-selection waveforms. COM9 to COM16
are non-selection waveforms at 1/8 duty factor
and COM12 to COM16 are non-selection
waveforms at 1/11 duty factor.
SEG1 to SEG40 40
O
LCD
Segment signals
V1 to V5
5
—
Power supply
Power supply for LCD drive
VCC –V5 = 11 V (max)
VCC, GND
2
—
Power supply
VCC: 2.7V to 5.5V, GND: 0V
OSC1, OSC2
2
—
Oscillation
resistor clock
When crystal oscillation is performed, a resistor
must be connected externally. When the pin input
is an external clock, it must be input to OSC1.
8
Function
HD44780U
Function Description
Registers
The HD44780U has two 8-bit registers, an instruction register (IR) and a data register (DR).
The IR stores instruction codes, such as display clear and cursor shift, and address information for display
data RAM (DDRAM) and character generator RAM (CGRAM). The IR can only be written from the MPU.
The DR temporarily stores data to be written into DDRAM or CGRAM and temporarily stores data to be
read from DDRAM or CGRAM. Data written into the DR from the MPU is automatically written into
DDRAM or CGRAM by an internal operation. The DR is also used for data storage when reading data
from DDRAM or CGRAM. When address information is written into the IR, data is read and then stored
into the DR from DDRAM or CGRAM by an internal operation. Data transfer between the MPU is then
completed when the MPU reads the DR. After the read, data in DDRAM or CGRAM at the next address is
sent to the DR for the next read from the MPU. By the register selector (RS) signal, these two registers can
be selected (Table 1).
Busy Flag (BF)
When the busy flag is 1, the HD44780U is in the internal operation mode, and the next instruction will not
be accepted. When RS = 0 and R/W = 1 (Table 1), the busy flag is output to DB7. The next instruction
must be written after ensuring that the busy flag is 0.
Address Counter (AC)
The address counter (AC) assigns addresses to both DDRAM and CGRAM. When an address of an
instruction is written into the IR, the address information is sent from the IR to the AC. Selection of either
DDRAM or CGRAM is also determined concurrently by the instruction.
After writing into (reading from) DDRAM or CGRAM, the AC is automatically incremented by 1
(decremented by 1). The AC contents are then output to DB0 to DB6 when RS = 0 and R/W = 1 (Table 1).
Table 1
Register Selection
RS
R/W
Operation
0
0
IR write as an internal operation (display clear, etc.)
0
1
Read busy flag (DB7) and address counter (DB0 to DB6)
1
0
DR write as an internal operation (DR to DDRAM or CGRAM)
1
1
DR read as an internal operation (DDRAM or CGRAM to DR)
9
HD44780U
Display Data RAM (DDRAM)
Display data RAM (DDRAM) stores display data represented in 8-bit character codes. Its extended
capacity is 80 × 8 bits, or 80 characters. The area in display data RAM (DDRAM) that is not used for
display can be used as general data RAM. See Figure 1 for the relationships between DDRAM addresses
and positions on the liquid crystal display.
The DDRAM address (ADD ) is set in the address counter (AC) as hexadecimal.
• 1-line display (N = 0) (Figure 2)
 When there are fewer than 80 display characters, the display begins at the head position. For
example, if using only the HD44780, 8 characters are displayed. See Figure 3.
When the display shift operation is performed, the DDRAM address shifts. See Figure 3.
High order
bits
Low order
bits
Example: DDRAM address 4E
AC
(hexadecimal) AC6 AC5 AC4 AC3 AC2 AC1 AC0
1
0
0
1
1
Figure 1 DDRAM Address
Display position
(digit)
1
2
3
DDRAM
00 01
address
(hexadecimal)
4
02
5
79
..................
03 04
Figure 2 1-Line Display
Display
position
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DDRAM
address
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
For
shift left
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
For
shift right 4F 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Figure 3 1-Line by 8-Character Display Example
10
80
4E 4F
1
0
HD44780U
• 2-line display (N = 1) (Figure 4)
 Case 1: When the number of display characters is less than 40 × 2 lines, the two lines are displayed
from the head. Note that the first line end address and the second line start address are not
consecutive. For example, when just the HD44780 is used, 8 characters × 2 lines are displayed. See
Figure 5.
When display shift operation is performed, the DDRAM address shifts. See Figure 5.
Display
position
1
2
3
00 01
DDRAM
address
(hexadecimal) 40 41
4
5
39
40
02
03 04
..................
26 27
42
43 44
..................
66 67
Figure 4 2-Line Display
Display
position
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DDRAM
address
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
For
shift left
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
27 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
For
shift right
67 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
11
HD44780U
 Case 2: For a 16-character × 2-line display, the HD44780 can be extended using one 40-output
extension driver. See Figure 6.
When display shift operation is performed, the DDRAM address shifts. See Figure 6.
Display
position
DDRAM
address
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F
HD44780U display
For
shift left
Extension driver
display
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50
27 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E
For
shift right
67 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E
12
HD44780U
Character Generator ROM (CGROM)
The character generator ROM generates 5 × 8 dot or 5 × 10 dot character patterns from 8-bit character
codes (Table 4). It can generate 208 5 × 8 dot character patterns and 32 5 × 10 dot character patterns. Userdefined character patterns are also available by mask-programmed ROM.
Character Generator RAM (CGRAM)
In the character generator RAM, the user can rewrite character patterns by program. For 5 × 8 dots, eight
character patterns can be written, and for 5 × 10 dots, four character patterns can be written.
Write into DDRAM the character codes at the addresses shown as the left column of Table 4 to show the
character patterns stored in CGRAM.
See Table 5 for the relationship between CGRAM addresses and data and display patterns.
Areas that are not used for display can be used as general data RAM.
Modifying Character Patterns
• Character pattern development procedure
The following operations correspond to the numbers listed in Figure 7:
1. Determine the correspondence between character codes and character patterns.
2. Create a listing indicating the correspondence between EPROM addresses and data.
3. Program the character patterns into the EPROM.
4. Send the EPROM to Hitachi.
5. Computer processing on the EPROM is performed at Hitachi to create a character pattern listing, which
is sent to the user.
6. If there are no problems within the character pattern listing, a trial LSI is created at Hitachi and samples
are sent to the user for evaluation. When it is confirmed by the user that the character patterns are
correctly written, mass production of the LSI proceeds at Hitachi.
13
HD44780U
Hitachi
User
Start
Computer
processing
Create character
pattern listing
5
Evaluate
character
patterns
No
Determine
character patterns
1
Create EPROM
address data listing
2
Write EPROM
3
EPROM → Hitachi
4
OK?
Yes
Art work
M/T
Masking
Trial
Sample
Sample
evaluation
OK?
6
No
Yes
Mass
production
Note: For a description of the numbers used in this figure, refer to the preceding page.
Figure 7 Character Pattern Development Procedure
14
HD44780U
• Programming character patterns
This section explains the correspondence between addresses and data used to program character patterns
in EPROM. The HD44780U character generator ROM can generate 208 5 × 8 dot character patterns and
32 5 × 10 dot character patterns for a total of 240 different character patterns.
 Character patterns
EPROM address data and character pattern data correspond with each other to form a 5 × 8 or 5 ×
10 dot character pattern (Tables 2 and 3).
Table 2
Example of Correspondence between EPROM Address Data and Character Pattern
(5 × 8 Dots)
Data
EPROM Address
LSB
A 1 1A 1 0 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 O 4 O3 O2 O1 O0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Character code
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Cursor position
Line
position
EPROM addresses A11 to A4 correspond to a character code.
EPROM addresses A3 to A0 specify a line position of the character pattern.
EPROM data O4 to O0 correspond to character pattern data.
EPROM data O5 to O7 must be specified as 0.
A lit display position (black) corresponds to a 1.
Line 9 and the following lines must be blanked with 0s for a 5 × 8 dot character fonts.
15
HD44780U
 Handling unused character patterns
1. EPROM data outside the character pattern area: Always input 0s.
2. EPROM data in CGRAM area: Always input 0s. (Input 0s to EPROM addresses 00H to FFH.)
3. EPROM data used when the user does not use any HD44780U character pattern: According to the user
application, handled in one of the two ways listed as follows.
a. When unused character patterns are not programmed: If an unused character code is written into
DDRAM, all its dots are lit. By not programing a character pattern, all of its bits become lit. (This is
due to the EPROM being filled with 1s after it is erased.)
b. When unused character patterns are programmed as 0s: Nothing is displayed even if unused
character codes are written into DDRAM. (This is equivalent to a space.)
Table 3
Example of Correspondence between EPROM Address Data and Character Pattern
(5 × 10 Dots)
Data
EPROM Address
LSB
A 1 1A 1 0 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 O 4 O3 O2 O1 O0
0
1
0
1
0
0
Character code
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
16
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Cursor position
Line
position
EPROM addresses A11 to A3 correspond to a character code.
EPROM addresses A3 to A0 specify a line position of the character pattern.
EPROM data O4 to O0 correspond to character pattern data.
EPROM data O5 to O7 must be specified as 0.
A lit display position (black) corresponds to a 1.
Line 11 and the following lines must be blanked with 0s for a 5 × 10 dot character fonts.
HD44780U
Table 4
Lower
4 Bits
Upper 4
Bits
Correspondence between Character Codes and Character Patterns (ROM Code: A00)
0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010
xxxx0000
CG
RAM
(1)
xxxx0001
(2)
xxxx0010
(3)
xxxx0011
(4)
xxxx0100
(5)
xxxx0101
(6)
xxxx0110
(7)
xxxx0111
(8)
xxxx1000
(1)
xxxx1001
(2)
xxxx1010
(3)
xxxx1011
(4)
xxxx1100
(5)
xxxx1101
(6)
xxxx1110
(7)
xxxx1111
(8)
1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
Note: The user can specify any pattern for character-generator RAM.
17
HD44780U
Table 4
Lower
4 Bits
Upper 4
Bits
Correspondence between Character Codes and Character Patterns (ROM Code: A02)
0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
xxxx0000
CG
RAM
(1)
xxxx0001
(2)
xxxx0010
(3)
xxxx0011
(4)
xxxx0100
(5)
xxxx0101
(6)
xxxx0110
(7)
xxxx0111
(8)
xxxx1000
(1)
xxxx1001
(2)
xxxx1010
(3)
xxxx1011
(4)
xxxx1100
(5)
xxxx1101
(6)
xxxx1110
(7)
xxxx1111
(8)
18
HD44780U
Table 5
Relationship between CGRAM Addresses, Character Codes (DDRAM) and Character
Patterns (CGRAM Data)
For 5 × 8 dot character patterns
Character Codes
(DDRAM data)
CGRAM Address
Character Patterns
(CGRAM data)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
High
High
High
Low
0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 * 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 * 1 1 1
0 0 0
0 0 1
1 1 1
Low
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
* * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
Low
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
Character
pattern (1)
Cursor position
Character
pattern (2)
Cursor position
* * *
Notes: 1. Character code bits 0 to 2 correspond to CGRAM address bits 3 to 5 (3 bits: 8 types).
2. CGRAM address bits 0 to 2 designate the character pattern line position. The 8th line is the
cursor position and its display is formed by a logical OR with the cursor.
Maintain the 8th line data, corresponding to the cursor display position, at 0 as the cursor display.
If the 8th line data is 1, 1 bits will light up the 8th line regardless of the cursor presence.
3. Character pattern row positions correspond to CGRAM data bits 0 to 4 (bit 4 being at the left).
4. As shown Table 5, CGRAM character patterns are selected when character code bits 4 to 7 are
all 0. However, since character code bit 3 has no effect, the R display example above can be
selected by either character code 00H or 08H.
5. 1 for CGRAM data corresponds to display selection and 0 to non-selection.
* Indicates no effect.
19
HD44780U
Table 5
Relationship between CGRAM Addresses, Character Codes (DDRAM) and Character
Patterns (CGRAM Data) (cont)
For 5 × 10 dot character patterns
Character Codes
(DDRAM data)
CGRAM Address
Character Patterns
(CGRAM data)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
High
High
High
Low
0 0 0 0 * 0 0 *
0 0 0 0 * 1 1 *
0 0
1 1
Low
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
* * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
Low
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
*
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
*
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
*
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
*
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
*
Character
pattern
Cursor position
* * * * *
* * *
* * *
* * * * *
* * *
* * * * *
Notes: 1. Character code bits 1 and 2 correspond to CGRAM address bits 4 and 5 (2 bits: 4 types).
2. CGRAM address bits 0 to 3 designate the character pattern line position. The 11th line is the
cursor position and its display is formed by a logical OR with the cursor.
Maintain the 11th line data corresponding to the cursor display positon at 0 as the cursor display.
If the 11th line data is “1”, “1” bits will light up the 11th line regardless of the cursor presence.
Since lines 12 to 16 are not used for display, they can be used for general data RAM.
3. Character pattern row positions are the same as 5 × 8 dot character pattern positions.
4. CGRAM character patterns are selected when character code bits 4 to 7 are all 0.
However, since character code bits 0 and 3 have no effect, the P display example above can be
selected by character codes 00H, 01H, 08H, and 09H.
5. 1 for CGRAM data corresponds to display selection and 0 to non-selection.
* Indicates no effect.
20
HD44780U
Timing Generation Circuit
The timing generation circuit generates timing signals for the operation of internal circuits such as
DDRAM, CGROM and CGRAM. RAM read timing for display and internal operation timing by MPU
access are generated separately to avoid interfering with each other. Therefore, when writing data to
DDRAM, for example, there will be no undesirable interferences, such as flickering, in areas other than the
display area.
Liquid Crystal Display Driver Circuit
The liquid crystal display driver circuit consists of 16 common signal drivers and 40 segment signal
drivers. When the character font and number of lines are selected by a program, the required common
signal drivers automatically output drive waveforms, while the other common signal drivers continue to
output non-selection waveforms.
Sending serial data always starts at the display data character pattern corresponding to the last address of
the display data RAM (DDRAM).
Since serial data is latched when the display data character pattern corresponding to the starting address
enters the internal shift register, the HD44780U drives from the head display.
Cursor/Blink Control Circuit
The cursor/blink control circuit generates the cursor or character blinking. The cursor or the blinking will
appear with the digit located at the display data RAM (DDRAM) address set in the address counter (AC).
For example (Figure 8), when the address counter is 08H, the cursor position is displayed at DDRAM
address 08H.
AC6 AC5 AC4 AC3 AC2 AC1 AC0
AC
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Display position
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
DDRAM address
(hexadecimal)
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
For a 1-line display
cursor position
For a 2-line display
Display position
DDRAM address
(hexadecimal)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
cursor position
Note: The cursor or blinking appears when the address counter (AC) selects the character
generator RAM (CGRAM). However, the cursor and blinking become meaningless.
The cursor or blinking is displayed in the meaningless position when the AC is a CGRAM address.
Figure 8 Cursor/Blink Display Example
21
HD44780U
Interfacing to the MPU
The HD44780U can send data in either two 4-bit operations or one 8-bit operation, thus allowing
interfacing with 4- or 8-bit MPUs.
• For 4-bit interface data, only four bus lines (DB4 to DB7) are used for transfer. Bus lines DB0 to DB3
are disabled. The data transfer between the HD44780U and the MPU is completed after the 4-bit data
has been transferred twice. As for the order of data transfer, the four high order bits (for 8-bit operation,
DB4 to DB7) are transferred before the four low order bits (for 8-bit operation, DB0 to DB3).
The busy flag must be checked (one instruction) after the 4-bit data has been transferred twice. Two
more 4-bit operations then transfer the busy flag and address counter data.
• For 8-bit interface data, all eight bus lines (DB0 to DB7) are used.
RS
R/W
E
DB7
IR7
IR3
BF
AC3
DR7
DR3
DB6
IR6
IR2
AC6
AC2
DR6
DR2
DB5
IR5
IR1
AC5
AC1
DR5
DR1
DB4
IR4
IR0
AC4
AC0
DR4
DR0
Instruction register (IR)
write
Busy flag (BF) and
address counter (AC)
read
Figure 9 4-Bit Transfer Example
22
Data register (DR)
read
HD44780U
Reset Function
Initializing by Internal Reset Circuit
An internal reset circuit automatically initializes the HD44780U when the power is turned on. The
following instructions are executed during the initialization. The busy flag (BF) is kept in the busy state
until the initialization ends (BF = 1). The busy state lasts for 10 ms after VCC rises to 4.5 V.
1. Display clear
2. Function set:
DL = 1; 8-bit interface data
N = 0; 1-line display
F = 0; 5 × 8 dot character font
3. Display on/off control:
D = 0; Display off
C = 0; Cursor off
B = 0; Blinking off
4. Entry mode set:
I/D = 1; Increment by 1
S = 0; No shift
Note: If the electrical characteristics conditions listed under the table Power Supply Conditions Using
Internal Reset Circuit are not met, the internal reset circuit will not operate normally and will fail to
initialize the HD44780U. For such a case, initial-ization must be performed by the MPU as
explained in the section, Initializing by Instruction.
Instructions
Outline
Only the instruction register (IR) and the data register (DR) of the HD44780U can be controlled by the
MPU. Before starting the internal operation of the HD44780U, control information is temporarily stored
into these registers to allow interfacing with various MPUs, which operate at different speeds, or various
peripheral control devices. The internal operation of the HD44780U is determined by signals sent from the
MPU. These signals, which include register selection signal (RS), read/
write signal (R/W), and the data bus (DB0 to DB7), make up the HD44780U instructions (Table 6). There
are four categories of instructions that:
• Designate HD44780U functions, such as display format, data length, etc.
• Set internal RAM addresses
• Perform data transfer with internal RAM
• Perform miscellaneous functions
23
HD44780U
Normally, instructions that perform data transfer with internal RAM are used the most. However, autoincrementation by 1 (or auto-decrementation by 1) of internal HD44780U RAM addresses after each data
write can lighten the program load of the MPU. Since the display shift instruction (Table 11) can perform
concurrently with display data write, the user can minimize system development time with maximum
programming efficiency.
When an instruction is being executed for internal operation, no instruction other than the busy flag/address
read instruction can be executed.
Because the busy flag is set to 1 while an instruction is being executed, check it to make sure it is 0 before
sending another instruction from the MPU.
Note: Be sure the HD44780U is not in the busy state (BF = 0) before sending an instruction from the
MPU to the HD44780U. If an instruction is sent without checking the busy flag, the time between
the first instruction and next instruction will take much longer than the instruction time itself. Refer
to Table 6 for the list of each instruc-tion execution time.
Table 6
Instructions
Code
Execution Time
(max) (when f cp or
f OSC is 270 kHz)
Instruction RS
R/W DB7 DB6 DB5 DB4 DB3 DB2 DB1 DB0 Description
Clear
display
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Clears entire display and
sets DDRAM address 0 in
address counter.
Return
home
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
—
Sets DDRAM address 0 in
address counter. Also
returns display from being
shifted to original position.
DDRAM contents remain
unchanged.
1.52 ms
Entry
mode set
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
I/D
S
Sets cursor move direction
and specifies display shift.
These operations are
performed during data write
and read.
37 µs
Display
on/off
control
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
D
C
B
Sets entire display (D) on/off, 37 µs
cursor on/off (C), and
blinking of cursor position
character (B).
Cursor or
display
shift
0
0
0
0
0
1
S/C R/L
—
—
Moves cursor and shifts
display without changing
DDRAM contents.
Function
set
0
0
0
0
1
DL
N
—
—
37 µs
Sets interface data length
(DL), number of display lines
(N), and character font (F).
Set
CGRAM
address
0
0
0
1
ACG ACG ACG ACG ACG ACG Sets CGRAM address.
CGRAM data is sent and
received after this setting.
37 µs
Set
DDRAM
address
0
0
1
ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD Sets DDRAM address.
DDRAM data is sent and
received after this setting.
37 µs
Read busy 0
flag &
address
1
BF
AC
0 µs
24
AC
AC
AC
F
AC
AC
AC
Reads busy flag (BF)
indicating internal operation
is being performed and
reads address counter
contents.
37 µs
HD44780U
Table 6
Instructions (cont)
Execution Time
(max) (when f cp or
f OSC is 270 kHz)
Code
Instruction RS
R/W DB7 DB6 DB5 DB4 DB3 DB2 DB1 DB0 Description
1
0
Write data
Writes data into DDRAM or
CGRAM.
37 µs
tADD = 4 µs*
Read data 1
from CG or
DDRAM
1
Read data
Reads data from DDRAM or
CGRAM.
37 µs
tADD = 4 µs*
= 1:
= 0:
= 1:
= 1:
= 0:
= 1:
= 0:
= 1:
= 1:
= 1:
= 1:
= 0:
Increment
Decrement
Accompanies display shift
Display shift
Cursor move
Shift to the right
Shift to the left
8 bits, DL = 0: 4 bits
2 lines, N = 0: 1 line
5 × 10 dots, F = 0: 5 × 8 dots
Internally operating
Instructions acceptable
DDRAM: Display data RAM
CGRAM: Character generator
RAM
ACG:
CGRAM address
ADD:
DDRAM address
(corresponds to cursor
address)
AC: Address counter used for
both DD and CGRAM
addresses
Execution time
changes when
frequency changes
Example:
When fcp or fOSC is
250 kHz,
270
37 µs ×
= 40 µs
250
Write data
to CG or
DDRAM
I/D
I/D
S
S/C
S/C
R/L
R/L
DL
N
F
BF
BF
Note:
— indicates no effect.
* After execution of the CGRAM/DDRAM data write or read instruction, the RAM address counter
is incremented or decremented by 1. The RAM address counter is updated after the busy flag
turns off. In Figure 10, tADD is the time elapsed after the busy flag turns off until the address
counter is updated.
Busy signal
(DB7 pin)
Address counter
(DB0 to DB6 pins)
Busy state
A
A+1
t ADD
Note: t ADD depends on the operation frequency
t ADD = 1.5/(f cp or f OSC ) seconds
Figure 10 Address Counter Update
25
HD44780U
Instruction Description
Clear Display
Clear display writes space code 20H (character pattern for character code 20H must be a blank pattern) into
all DDRAM addresses. It then sets DDRAM address 0 into the address counter, and returns the display to
its original status if it was shifted. In other words, the display disappears and the cursor or blinking goes to
the left edge of the display (in the first line if 2 lines are displayed). It also sets I/D to 1 (increment mode)
in entry mode. S of entry mode does not change.
Return Home
Return home sets DDRAM address 0 into the address counter, and returns the display to its original status
if it was shifted. The DDRAM contents do not change.
The cursor or blinking go to the left edge of the display (in the first line if 2 lines are displayed).
Entry Mode Set
I/D: Increments (I/D = 1) or decrements (I/D = 0) the DDRAM address by 1 when a character code is
written into or read from DDRAM.
The cursor or blinking moves to the right when incremented by 1 and to the left when decremented by 1.
The same applies to writing and reading of CGRAM.
S: Shifts the entire display either to the right (I/D = 0) or to the left (I/D = 1) when S is 1. The display does
not shift if S is 0.
If S is 1, it will seem as if the cursor does not move but the display does. The display does not shift when
reading from DDRAM. Also, writing into or reading out from CGRAM does not shift the display.
Display On/Off Control
D: The display is on when D is 1 and off when D is 0. When off, the display data remains in DDRAM, but
can be displayed instantly by setting D to 1.
C: The cursor is displayed when C is 1 and not displayed when C is 0. Even if the cursor disappears, the
function of I/D or other specifications will not change during display data write. The cursor is displayed
using 5 dots in the 8th line for 5 × 8 dot character font selection and in the 11th line for the 5 × 10 dot
character font selection (Figure 13).
B: The character indicated by the cursor blinks when B is 1 (Figure 13). The blinking is displayed as
switching between all blank dots and displayed characters at a speed of 409.6-ms intervals when fcp or f OSC
is 250 kHz. The cursor and blinking can be set to display simultaneously. (The blinking frequency changes
according to f OSC or the reciprocal of f cp . For example, when fcp is 270 kHz, 409.6 × 250/270 = 379.2 ms.)
26
HD44780U
Cursor or Display Shift
Cursor or display shift shifts the cursor position or display to the right or left without writing or reading
display data (Table 7). This function is used to correct or search the display. In a 2-line display, the cursor
moves to the second line when it passes the 40th digit of the first line. Note that the first and second line
displays will shift at the same time.
When the displayed data is shifted repeatedly each line moves only horizontally. The second line display
does not shift into the first line position.
The address counter (AC) contents will not change if the only action performed is a display shift.
Function Set
DL: Sets the interface data length. Data is sent or received in 8-bit lengths (DB7 to DB0) when DL is 1,
and in 4-bit lengths (DB7 to DB4) when DL is 0.When 4-bit length is selected, data must be sent or
received twice.
N: Sets the number of display lines.
F: Sets the character font.
Note: Perform the function at the head of the program before executing any instructions (except for the
read busy flag and address instruction). From this point, the function set instruction cannot be
executed unless the interface data length is changed.
Set CGRAM Address
Set CGRAM address sets the CGRAM address binary AAAAAA into the address counter.
Data is then written to or read from the MPU for CGRAM.
27
HD44780U
RS
Clear
display
Code
0
RS
Return
home
Code
0
RS
Entry
mode set
Code
0
RS
Display
on/off control
Code
0
RS
Cursor or
display shift
Code
0
RS
Function set
Code
0
RS
Set CGRAM
address
Code
0
R/W DB7 DB6 DB5 DB4 DB3 DB2 DB1 DB0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
*
Note: * Don’t care.
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
I/D
S
0
0
0
0
0
1
D
C
B
0
0
0
0
1
S/C
R/L
*
*
0
0
0
1
DL
N
F
*
*
0
0
1
A
A
A
Higher
order bit
Figure 11 Instruction (1)
28
0
A
A
Lower
order bit
A
Note: * Don’t care.
HD44780U
Set DDRAM Address
Set DDRAM address sets the DDRAM address binary AAAAAAA into the address counter.
Data is then written to or read from the MPU for DDRAM.
However, when N is 0 (1-line display), AAAAAAA can be 00H to 4FH. When N is 1 (2-line display),
AAAAAAA can be 00H to 27H for the first line, and 40H to 67H for the second line.
Read Busy Flag and Address
Read busy flag and address reads the busy flag (BF) indicating that the system is now internally operating
on a previously received instruction. If BF is 1, the internal operation is in progress. The next instruction
will not be accepted until BF is reset to 0. Check the BF status before the next write operation. At the same
time, the value of the address counter in binary AAAAAAA is read out. This address counter is used by
both CG and DDRAM addresses, and its value is determined by the previous instruction. The address
contents are the same as for instructions set CGRAM address and set DDRAM address.
Table 7
Shift Function
S/C
R/L
0
0
Shifts the cursor position to the left. (AC is decremented by one.)
0
1
Shifts the cursor position to the right. (AC is incremented by one.)
1
0
Shifts the entire display to the left. The cursor follows the display shift.
1
1
Shifts the entire display to the right. The cursor follows the display shift.
Table 8
Function Set
N
F
No. of
Display
Lines
0
0
1
5 × 8 dots
1/8
0
1
1
5 × 10 dots
1/11
1
*
2
5 × 8 dots
1/16
Note:
*
Character Font
Duty
Factor
Remarks
Cannot display two lines for 5 × 10 dot character font
Indicates don’t care.
29
HD44780U
Cursor
5 × 8 dot
character font
5 × 10 dot
character font
Alternating display
Cursor display example
Blink display example
Figure 12 Cursor and Blinking
RS
Set DDRAM
address
Code
0
0
1
A
A
A
A
Higher
order bit
RS
Read busy flag
and address
Code
0
A
A
Lower
order bit
1
BF
A
A
A
Higher
order bit
30
A
A
A
A
Lower
order bit
A
HD44780U
Write Data to CG or DDRAM
Write data to CG or DDRAM writes 8-bit binary data DDDDDDDD to CG or DDRAM.
To write into CG or DDRAM is determined by the previous specification of the CGRAM or DDRAM
address setting. After a write, the address is automatically incremented or decremented by 1 according to
the entry mode. The entry mode also determines the display shift.
Read Data from CG or DDRAM
Read data from CG or DDRAM reads 8-bit binary data DDDDDDDD from CG or DDRAM.
The previous designation determines whether CG or DDRAM is to be read. Before entering this read
instruction, either CGRAM or DDRAM address set instruction must be executed. If not executed, the first
read data will be invalid. When serially executing read instructions, the next address data is normally read
from the second read. The address set instructions need not be executed just before this read instruction
when shifting the cursor by the cursor shift instruction (when reading out DDRAM). The operation of the
cursor shift instruction is the same as the set DDRAM address instruction.
After a read, the entry mode automatically increases or decreases the address by 1. However, display shift
is not executed regardless of the entry mode.
Note: The address counter (AC) is automatically incremented or decremented by 1 after the write
instructions to CGRAM or DDRAM are executed. The RAM data selected by the AC cannot be
read out at this time even if read instructions are executed. Therefore, to correctly read data,
execute either the address set instruction or cursor shift instruction (only with DDRAM), then just
before reading the desired data, execute the read instruction from the second time the read
instruction is sent.
RS
Write data to
CG or DDRAM
Code
1
0
D
D
D
D
D
Higher
order bits
RS
Read data from
CG or DDRAM
Code
1
D
D
D
Lower
order bits
1
D
D
D
Higher
order bits
D
D
D
D
D
Lower
order bits
31
HD44780U
Interfacing the HD44780U
Interface to MPUs
• Interfacing to an 8-bit MPU
2
%
/
.
,
+
*
)
&
(
$
0"
See Figure 16 for an example of using a I/O port (for a single-chip microcomputer) as an interface
device.
In this example, P30 to P37 are connected to the data bus DB0 to DB7, and P75 to P77 are connected to
E, R/W, and RS, respectively.
RS
R/W
E
Internal
operation
Functioning
Data
Busy
Busy
Instruction
write
Busy flag
check
Busy flag
check
DB7
Not
busy
Data
Busy flag
check
Instruction
write
Figure 15 Example of Busy Flag Check Timing Sequence
H8/325
HD44780U
P30 to P37
P77
P76
P75
8
DB0 to DB7
E
RS
R/W
COM1 to
COM16
16
SEG1 to
SEG40
40
LCD
Figure 16 H8/325 Interface (Single-Chip Mode)
32
HD44780U
• Interfacing to a 4-bit MPU
The HD44780U can be connected to the I/O port of a 4-bit MPU. If the I/O port has enough bits, 8-bit
data can be transferred. Otherwise, one data transfer must be made in two operations for 4-bit data. In
this case, the timing sequence becomes somewhat complex. (See Figure 17.)
See Figure 18 for an interface example to the HMCS4019R.
Note that two cycles are needed for the busy flag check as well as for the data transfer. The 4-bit
operation is selected by the program.
RS
2
)
(
'
&
%
*
$
!
6
5
4
3
-!"01'.,
R/W
E
Internal
operation
DB7
Functioning
IR7
IR3
Instruction
write
Busy AC3
Not
busy AC3
Busy flag
check
Busy flag
check
D7
D3
Instruction
write
Note: IR7 , IR3 are the 7th and 3rd bits of the instruction.
AC3 is the 3rd bit of the address counter.
Figure 17 Example of 4-Bit Data Transfer Timing Sequence
HMCS4019R
HD44780
D15
RS
D14
R/W
D13
E
R10 to R13
4
DB4 to DB7
COM1 to
COM16
16
LCD
SEG1 to
SEG40
40
Figure 18 Example of Interface to HMCS4019R
33
HD44780U
Interface to Liquid Crystal Display
Character Font and Number of Lines: The HD44780U can perform two types of displays, 5 × 8 dot and
5 × 10 dot character fonts, each with a cursor.
Up to two lines are displayed for 5 × 8 dots and one line for 5 × 10 dots. Therefore, a total of three
types of common signals are available (Table 9).
The number of lines and font types can be selected by the program. (See Table 6, Instructions.)
Connection to HD44780 and Liquid Crystal Display: See Figure 19 for the connection examples.
Table 9
Common Signals
Number of Lines
Character Font
Number of Common Signals
Duty Factor
1
5 × 8 dots + cursor
8
1/8
1
11
1/11
2
16
1/16
HD44780
COM1
COM8
SEG1
SEG40
Example of a 5 × 8 dot, 8-character × 1-line display (1/4 bias, 1/8 duty cycle)
HD44780
COM1
COM11
SEG1
SEG40
Figure 19 Liquid Crystal Display and HD44780 Connections
34
HD44780U
Since five segment signal lines can display one digit, one HD44780U can display up to 8 digits for a 1-line
display and 16 digits for a 2-line display.
The examples in Figure 19 have unused common signal pins, which always output non-selection
waveforms. When the liquid crystal display panel has unused extra scanning lines, connect the extra
scanning lines to these common signal pins to avoid any undesirable effects due to crosstalk during the
floating state.
HD44780
COM1
COM8
COM9
COM16
SEG1
SEG40
Figure 19 Liquid Crystal Display and HD44780 Connections (cont)
35
HD44780U
Connection of Changed Matrix Layout: In the preceding examples, the number of lines correspond to the
scanning lines. However, the following display examples (Figure 20) are made possible by altering the
matrix layout of the liquid crystal display panel. In either case, the only change is the layout. The display
characteristics and the number of liquid crystal display characters depend on the number of common
signals or on duty factor. Note that the display data RAM (DDRAM) addresses for 4 characters × 2 lines
and for 16 characters × 1 line are the same as in Figure 19.
HD44780
COM1
COM8
SEG1
SEG40
COM9
COM16
5 × 8 dot, 16-character × 1-line display
(1/5 bias, 1/16 duty cycle)
Figure 20 Changed Matrix Layout Displays
36
HD44780U
Power Supply for Liquid Crystal Display Drive
Various voltage levels must be applied to pins V1 to V5 of the HD44780U to obtain the liquid crystal
display drive waveforms. The voltages must be changed according to the duty factor (Table 10).
VLCD is the peak value for the liquid crystal display drive waveforms, and resistance dividing provides
voltages V1 to V5 (Figure 21).
Table 10
Duty Factor and Power Supply for Liquid Crystal Display Drive
Duty Factor
1/8, 1/11
1/16
Bias
Power Supply
1/4
1/5
V1
VCC–1/4 VLCD
VCC–1/5 VLCD
V2
VCC–1/2 VLCD
VCC–2/5 VLCD
V3
VCC–1/2 VLCD
VCC–3/5 VLCD
V4
VCC–3/4 VLCD
VCC–4/5 VLCD
V5
VCC–VLCD
VCC–VLCD
VCC (+5 V)
VCC (+5 V)
VCC
VCC
R
V1
V1
V2
V3
R
VLCD
R
V4
R
V5
V2
V3
V4
V5
R
R
VLCD
R
R
VR
VR
–5 V
–5 V
1/4 bias
(1/8, 1/11 duty cycle)
R
1/5 bias
(1/16, duty cycle)
Figure 21 Drive Voltage Supply Example
37
HD44780U
Relationship between Oscillation Frequency and Liquid Crystal Display Frame
Frequency
The liquid crystal display frame frequencies of Figure 22 apply only when the oscillation frequency is 270
kHz (one clock pulse of 3.7 µs).
1/8 duty cycle
COM1
400 clocks
1
2
3
4
8
1
2
11
1
2
1
2
VCC
V1
V2 (V3)
V4
V5
1 frame
1 frame = 3.7 µs × 400 × 8 = 11850 µs = 11.9 ms
1
Frame frequency =
= 84.3 Hz
11.9 ms
1/11 duty cycle
COM1
400 clocks
1
2
3
4
VCC
V1
V2 (V3)
V4
V5
1 frame
1 frame = 3.7 µs × 400 × 11 = 16300 µs = 16.3 ms
1
Frame frequency =
= 61.4 Hz
16.3 ms
1/16 duty cycle
COM1
200 clocks
1
2
3
4
VCC
16
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
1 frame
1 frame = 3.7 µs × 200 × 16 = 11850 µs = 11.9 ms
1
= 84.3 Hz
11.9 ms
Frame frequency =
Figure 22 Frame Frequency
38
HD44780U
Instruction and Display Correspondence
• 8-bit operation, 8-digit × 1-line display with internal reset
Refer to Table 11 for an example of an 8-digit × 1-line display in 8-bit operation. The HD44780U
functions must be set by the function set instruction prior to the display. Since the display data RAM
can store data for 80 characters, as explained before, the RAM can be used for displays such as for
advertising when combined with the display shift operation.
Since the display shift operation changes only the display position with DDRAM contents unchanged,
the first display data entered into DDRAM can be output when the return home operation is performed.
• 4-bit operation, 8-digit × 1-line display with internal reset
The program must set all functions prior to the 4-bit operation (Table 12). When the power is turned on,
8-bit operation is automatically selected and the first write is performed as an 8-bit operation. Since
DB0 to DB3 are not connected, a rewrite is then required. However, since one operation is completed in
two accesses for 4-bit operation, a rewrite is needed to set the functions (see Table 12). Thus, DB4 to
DB7 of the function set instruction is written twice.
• 8-bit operation, 8-digit × 2-line display
For a 2-line display, the cursor automatically moves from the first to the second line after the 40th digit
of the first line has been written. Thus, if there are only 8 characters in the first line, the DDRAM
address must be again set after the 8th character is completed. (See Table 13.) Note that the display shift
operation is performed for the first and second lines. In the example of Table 13, the display shift is
performed when the cursor is on the second line. However, if the shift operation is performed when the
cursor is on the first line, both the first and second lines move together. If the shift is repeated, the
display of the second line will not move to the first line. The same display will only shift within its own
line for the number of times the shift is repeated.
Note: When using the internal reset, the electrical characteristics in the Power Supply Conditions Using
Internal Reset Circuit table must be satisfied. If not, the HD44780U must be initialized by
instructions. See the section, Initializing by Instruction.
39
HD44780U
Table 11
8-Bit Operation, 8-Digit × 1-Line Display Example with Internal Reset
Instruction
Step
No.
RS
1
Power supply on (the HD44780U is initialized by the internal
reset circuit)
Initialized. No display.
2
Function set
0
0
0
Sets to 8-bit operation and
selects 1-line display and 5 × 8
dot character font. (Number of
display lines and character
fonts cannot be changed after
step #2.)
3
4
5
6
R/W DB7 DB6 DB5 DB4 DB3 DB2 DB1 DB0 Display
0
1
1
0
0
*
*
Display on/off control
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
Entry mode set
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
Write data to CGRAM/DDRAM
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
7
8
9
10
40
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Turns on display and cursor.
Entire display is in space mode
because of initialization.
_
Sets mode to increment the
address by one and to shift the
cursor to the right at the time of
write to the DD/CGRAM.
Display is not shifted.
_
Writes H. DDRAM has already
been selected by initialization
when the power was turned on.
The cursor is incremented by
one and shifted to the right.
H_
Writes I.
HI_
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
Entry mode set
0
0
0
Operation
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
HITACHI_
HITACHI_
ITACHI _
Writes I.
Sets mode to shift display at
the time of write.
Writes a space.
HD44780U
Table 11
8-Bit Operation, 8-Digit × 1-Line Display Example with Internal Reset (cont)
Instruction
Step
No.
RS
11
1
0
0
1
0
0
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1
0
1
·
·
·
·
·
1
1
1
1
Cursor or display shift
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
*
*
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
*
*
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
*
*
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
*
*
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
Writes M.
MICROKO_
Writes O.
MICROKO
_
Shifts only the cursor position
to the left.
MICROKO
_
Shifts only the cursor position
to the left.
ICROCO
_
Writes C over K.
The display moves to the left.
MICROCO
_
Shifts the display and cursor
position to the right.
MICROCO_
Shifts the display and cursor
position to the right.
ICROCOM_
Writes M.
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
Return home
0
0
0
TACHI M_
·
·
·
·
·
1
0
0
1
0
0
20
21
1
Operation
0
0
0
1
0
HITACHI
_
Returns both display and
cursor to the original position
(address 0).
41
HD44780U
Table 12
Instruction
Step
No.
RS
1
reset circuit)
2
Function set
0
0
0
0
1
0
Sets to 4-bit operation.
In this case, operation is
handled as 8 bits by initialization, and only this instruction
completes with one write.
Function set
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
*
0
*
3
4
5
6
Note:
42
R/W DB7 DB6 DB5 DB4
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
Entry mode set
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
Display
Operation
Sets 4-bit operation and
dot character font. 4-bit
operation starts from this step
and resetting is necessary.
(Number of display lines and
character fonts cannot be
changed after step #3.)
_
_
H_
The control is the same as for 8-bit operation beyond step #6.
Entire display is in space mode
Writes H.
one and shifts to the right.
HD44780U
Table 13
Instruction
Step
No.
RS
1
reset circuit)
2
Function set
0
0
0
Sets to 8-bit operation and
dot character font.
3
4
5
0
1
1
1
0
*
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
Entry mode set
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
6
7
8
1
0
0
0
All display is in space mode
_
_
Writes H. DDRAM has already
been selected by initialization
when the power was turned on.
one and shifted to the right.
H_
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
Set DDRAM address
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
Operation
0
HITACHI_
HITACHI
_
Writes I.
Sets DDRAM address so that
the cursor is positioned at the
head of the second line.
43
HD44780U
Table 13
8-Bit Operation, 8-Digit × 2-Line Display Example with Internal Reset (cont)
Instruction
Step
No.
RS
9
1
0
0
1
0
0
10
11
12
13
44
1
0
1
·
·
·
·
·
HITACHI
M_
1
1
1
1
HITACHI
MICROCO_
Entry mode set
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
HITACHI
MICROCO_
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
ITACHI
ICROCOM_
0
0
·
·
·
·
·
Return home
0
0
0
0
0
Writes M.
·
·
·
·
·
1
0
0
1
0
0
14
15
1
Operation
Writes O.
Sets mode to shift display at
the time of write.
Writes M. Display is shifted to
the left. The first and second
lines both shift at the same
time.
·
·
·
·
·
0
0
0
1
0
_
HITACHI
MICROCOM
Returns both display and
cursor to the original position
(address 0).
HD44780U
Initializing by Instruction
If the power supply conditions for correctly operating the internal reset circuit are not met, initialization by
instructions becomes necessary.
Refer to Figures 23 and 24 for the procedures on 8-bit and 4-bit initializations, respectively.
Power on
Wait for more than 40 ms
after VCC rises to 2.7 V
RS R/WDB7 DB6 DB5 DB4 DB3DB2 DB1 DB0
0 0 0 0 1 1 * * * *
BF cannot be checked before this instruction.
Function set (Interface is 8 bits long.)
Wait for more than 4.1 ms
RS R/WDB7 DB6 DB5 DB4 DB3 DB2 DB1 DB0
0 0 0 0 1 1 * * * *
Wait for more than 100 µs
0 0 0 0 1 1 * * * *
BF can be checked after the following instructions.
When BF is not checked, the waiting time between
instructions is longer than the execution instuction
time. (See Table 6.)
0 0 0 0 1 1 N F * *
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
I/D S
Function set (Interface is 8 bits long. Specify the
number of display lines and character font.)
The number of display lines and character font
cannot be changed after this point.
Display off
Display clear
Entry mode set
Initialization ends
Figure 23 8-Bit Interface
45
HD44780U
Power on
RS R/W DB7 DB6 DB5 DB4
0 0 0 0 1 1
Wait for more than 4.1 ms
0 0 0 0 1 1
Wait for more than 100 µs
0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 0
BF can be checked after the following instructions.
When BF is not checked, the waiting time between
instructions is longer than the execution instuction
time. (See Table 6.)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
0
0
0
0
1
1 0
* *
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 1
0 0
I/D S
Function set (Set interface to be 4 bits long.)
Interface is 8 bits in length.
Function set (Interface is 4 bits long. Specify the
number of display lines and character font.)
The number of display lines and character font
cannot be changed after this point.
Display off
Display clear
Initialization ends
Entry mode set
Figure 24 4-Bit Interface
46
HD44780U
Absolute Maximum Ratings*
Item
Symbol
Value
Unit
Notes
Power supply voltage (1)
VCC–GND
–0.3 to +7.0
V
1
Power supply voltage (2)
VCC–V5
–0.3 to +13.0
V
1, 2
Input voltage
Vt
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
1
Operating temperature
Topr
–30 to +75
°C
Storage temperature
Tstg
–55 to +125
°C
Note:
*
4
If the LSI is used above these absolute maximum ratings, it may become permanently damaged.
Using the LSI within the following electrical characteristic limits is strongly recommended for
normal operation. If these electrical characteristic conditions are also exceeded, the LSI will
malfunction and cause poor reliability.
47
HD44780U
DC Characteristics (VCC = 2.7 to 4.5 V, Ta = –30 to +75°C*3)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Input high voltage (1)
(except OSC1)
VIH1
0.7V CC
—
VCC
V
6
Input low voltage (1)
(except OSC1)
VIL1
–0.3
—
0.55
V
6
(OSC1)
VIH2
0.7V CC
—
VCC
V
15
(OSC1)
VIL2
—
—
0.2V CC
V
15
Output high voltage (1) VOH1
(DB0–DB7)
0.75V CC
—
—
V
–I OH = 0.1 mA
7
Output low voltage (1)
(DB0–DB7)
—
—
0.2V CC
V
I OL = 0.1 mA
7
(except DB0–DB7)
0.8V CC
—
—
V
–I OH = 0.04 mA
8
(except DB0–DB7)
VOL2
—
—
0.2V CC
V
I OL = 0.04 mA
8
Driver on resistance
(COM)
RCOM
—
2
20
kΩ
±Id = 0.05 mA,
VLCD = 4 V
13
(SEG)
RSEG
—
2
30
kΩ
±Id = 0.05 mA,
VLCD = 4 V
13
Input leakage current
I LI
–1
—
1
µA
VIN = 0 to VCC
9
Pull-up MOS current
(DB0–DB7, RS, R/W)
–I p
10
50
120
µA
VCC = 3 V
Power supply current
I CC
—
150
300
µA
Rf oscillation,
external clock
VCC = 3 V,
f OSC = 270 kHz
LCD voltage
VLCD1
3.0
—
11.0
V
VCC–V5, 1/5 bias 16
VLCD2
3.0
—
11.0
V
VCC–V5, 1/4 bias 16
Note:
48
*
VOL1
Test Condition Notes*
Refer to the Electrical Characteristics Notes section following these tables.
10, 14
HD44780U
AC Characteristics (VCC = 2.7 to 4.5 V, Ta = –30 to +75°C*3)
Clock Characteristics
Item
Symbol Min
Typ
Max
Unit
External External clock frequency
clock
External clock duty
operation
External clock rise time
f cp
125
250
350
kHz
Duty
45
50
55
%
t rcp
—
—
0.2
µs
t fcp
—
—
0.2
µs
190
270
350
kHz
External clock fall time
Rf
Clock oscillation frequency f OSC
oscillation
Note:
*
Test Condition Note*
11
Rf = 75 kΩ,
VCC = 3 V
12
Bus Timing Characteristics
Write Operation
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Enable cycle time
t cycE
1000
—
—
ns
Figure 25
Enable pulse width (high level)
PWEH
450
—
—
Enable rise/fall time
t Er, t Ef
—
—
25
Address set-up time (RS, R/W to E) t AS
60
—
—
Address hold time
t AH
20
—
—
Data set-up time
t DSW
195
—
—
Data hold time
tH
10
—
—
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Enable cycle time
t cycE
1000
—
—
ns
Figure 26
PWEH
450
—
—
t Er, t Ef
—
—
25
60
—
—
Address hold time
t AH
20
—
—
Data delay time
t DDR
—
—
360
Data hold time
t DHR
5
—
—
Read Operation
49
HD44780U
Interface Timing Characteristics with External Driver
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
High level
t CWH
800
—
—
ns
Figure 27
Low level
t CWL
800
—
—
Clock set-up time
t CSU
500
—
—
Data set-up time
t SU
300
—
—
Data hold time
t DH
300
—
—
M delay time
t DM
–1000
—
1000
Clock rise/fall time
t ct
—
—
200
Clock pulse width
Power Supply Conditions Using Internal Reset Circuit
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Power supply rise time
t rCC
0.1
—
10
ms
Figure 28
Power supply off time
t OFF
1
—
—
50
HD44780U
DC Characteristics (VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = –30 to +75°C*3)
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
(except OSC1)
VIH1
2.2
—
VCC
V
6
(except OSC1)
VIL1
–0.3
—
0.6
V
6
(OSC1)
VIH2
VCC–1.0
—
VCC
V
15
(OSC1)
VIL2
—
—
1.0
V
15
(DB0–DB7)
2.4
—
—
V
–I OH = 0.205 mA
7
(DB0–DB7)
—
—
0.4
V
I OL = 1.2 mA
7
(except DB0–DB7)
0.9 VCC
—
—
V
–I OH = 0.04 mA
8
(except DB0–DB7)
VOL2
—
—
0.1 VCC
V
I OL = 0.04 mA
8
(COM)
RCOM
—
2
20
kΩ
±Id = 0.05 mA,
VLCD = 4 V
13
(SEG)
RSEG
—
2
30
kΩ
±Id = 0.05 mA,
VLCD = 4 V
13
Input leakage current
I LI
–1
—
1
µA
VIN = 0 to VCC
9
Pull-up MOS current
(DB0–DB7, RS, R/W)
–I p
50
125
250
µA
VCC = 5 V
Power supply current
I CC
—
350
600
µA
Rf oscillation,
external clock
VCC = 5 V,
f OSC = 270 kHz
10, 14
LCD voltage
VLCD1
3.0
—
11.0
V
VCC–V5, 1/5 bias
16
VLCD2
3.0
—
11.0
V
VCC–V5, 1/4 bias
16
Note:
*
VOL1
Test Condition
Notes*
51
HD44780U
AC Characteristics (VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = –30 to +75°C*3)
Clock Characteristics
Item
Symbol Min
Typ
Max
Unit
External External clock frequency
clock
External clock duty
operation
External clock rise time
f cp
125
250
350
kHz
11
Duty
45
50
55
%
11
t rcp
—
—
0.2
µs
11
t fcp
—
—
0.2
µs
11
190
270
350
kHz
External clock fall time
Rf
Clock oscillation frequency f OSC
oscillation
Note:
*
Test Condition Notes*
Rf = 91 kΩ
VCC = 5.0 V
12
Bus Timing Characteristics
Write Operation
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Enable cycle time
t cycE
500
—
—
ns
Figure 25
PWEH
230
—
—
t Er, t Ef
—
—
20
40
—
—
Address hold time
t AH
10
—
—
Data set-up time
t DSW
80
—
—
Data hold time
tH
10
—
—
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Enable cycle time
t cycE
500
—
—
ns
Figure 26
PWEH
230
—
—
t Er, t Ef
—
—
20
40
—
—
Address hold time
t AH
10
—
—
Data delay time
t DDR
—
—
160
Data hold time
t DHR
5
—
—
Read Operation
52
HD44780U
Interface Timing Characteristics with External Driver
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
High level
t CWH
800
—
—
ns
Figure 27
Low level
t CWL
800
—
—
Clock set-up time
t CSU
500
—
—
Data set-up time
t SU
300
—
—
Data hold time
t DH
300
—
—
M delay time
t DM
–1000
—
1000
Clock rise/fall time
t ct
—
—
100
Clock pulse width
Power Supply Conditions Using Internal Reset Circuit
Item
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Power supply rise time
t rCC
0.1
—
10
ms
Figure 28
Power supply off time
t OFF
1
—
—
53
HD44780U
Electrical Characteristics Notes
1. All voltage values are referred to GND = 0 V.
VCC
B
V1
A = VCC –V5
B = VCC –V1
A ≥ 1.5 V
B ≤ 0.25 × A
A
V5
The conditions of V1 and V5 voltages are for proper
operation of the LSI and not for the LCD output level.
The LCD drive voltage condition for the LCD output
level is specified as LCD voltage VLCD.
2. VCC ≥ V1 ≥ V2 ≥ V3 ≥ V4 ≥ V5 must be maintained.
3. For die products, specified at 75°C.
4. For die products, specified by the die shipment specification.
5. The following four circuits are I/O pin configurations except for liquid crystal display output.
Input pin
Pin: E (MOS without pull-up)
Output pin
Pins: CL1, CL2, M, D
Pins: RS, R/W (MOS with pull-up)
VCC
VCC
PMOS
PMOS
VCC
PMOS
PMOS
NMOS
NMOS
(pull up MOS)
NMOS
I/O Pin
Pins: DB0 –DB7
(MOS with pull-up)
VCC
(pull-up MOS)
VCC
(input circuit)
PMOS
PMOS
Input enable
NMOS
VCC
NMOS
PMOS
Output enable
Data
NMOS
(output circuit)
(tristate)
54
HD44780U
6. Applies to input pins and I/O pins, excluding the OSC1 pin.
7. Applies to I/O pins.
8. Applies to output pins.
9. Current flowing through pull–up MOSs, excluding output drive MOSs.
10. Input/output current is excluded. When input is at an intermediate level with CMOS, the excessive
current flows through the input circuit to the power supply. To avoid this from happening, the input
level must be fixed high or low.
11. Applies only to external clock operation.
Th
Oscillator
Open
Tl
OSC1
0.7 VCC
0.5 VCC
0.3 VCC
OSC2
t rcp
Duty =
t fcp
Th
× 100%
Th + Tl
12. Applies only to the internal oscillator operation using oscillation resistor Rf.
OSC1
Rf
OSC2
R f : 75 k Ω ± 2% (when VCC = 3 V)
R f : 91 k Ω ± 2% (when VCC = 5 V)
Since the oscillation frequency varies depending on the OSC1 and
OSC2 pin capacitance, the wiring length to these pins should be minimized.
VCC = 5 V
500
500
400
300
(270)
max.
200
typ.
min.
50
(91)100
R f (k Ω)
150
f OSC (kHz)
f OSC (kHz)
400
100
VCC = 3 V
300
(270)
max.
200
100
typ.
50
(75)
100
min.
150
R f (k Ω)
55
HD44780U
13. RCOM is the resistance between the power supply pins (VCC, V1, V4, V5) and each common signal pin
(COM1 to COM16).
RSEG is the resistance between the power supply pins (VCC, V2, V3, V5) and each segment signal pin
(SEG1 to SEG40).
14. The following graphs show the relationship between operation frequency and current consumption.
VCC = 3 V
1.8
1.8
1.6
1.6
1.4
1.4
1.2
1.2
1.0
max.
0.8
typ.
0.6
ICC (mA)
ICC (mA)
VCC = 5 V
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.0
0
100
200
300
fOSC or fcp (kHz)
400
500
0.0
max.
typ.
0
100
200
300
400
500
fOSC or fcp (kHz)
15. Applies to the OSC1 pin.
16. Each COM and SEG output voltage is within ±0.15 V of the LCD voltage (V CC, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5)
when there is no load.
56
HD44780U
Load Circuits
Data Bus DB0 to DB7
VCC = 5 V
For VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V
For VCC = 2.7 to 4.5 V
3.9 k Ω
Test
point
90 pF
11 k Ω
Test
point
IS2074 H
diodes
50 pF
External Driver Control Signals: CL1, CL2, D, M
Test
point
30 pF
57
HD44780U
Timing Characteristics
VIH1
VIL1
RS
VIH1
VIL1
tAS
R/W
tAH
VIL1
VIL1
PWEH
tAH
tEf
VIH1
VIL1
E
VIH1
VIL1
tEr
tH
tDSW
VIH1
VIL1
DB0 to DB7
VIL1
VIH1
VIL1
Valid data
tcycE
Figure 25 Write Operation
VIH1
VIL1
RS
VIH1
VIL1
tAS
tAH
VIH1
R/W
VIH1
PWEH
tAH
tEf
VIH1
VIL1
E
VIH1
VIL1
VIL1
tEr
tDHR
tDDR
DB0 to DB7
VOH1
VOL1 *
Valid data
tcycE
Note:
* VOL1 is assumed to be 0.8 V at 2 MHz operation.
Figure 26 Read Operation
58
VOH1
* VOL1
HD44780U
tct
VOH2
CL1
VOH2
tCWH
tCSU
CL2
VOL2
tCWH
VOH2
VOL2
tCWL
tct
tCSU
VOH2
VOL2
D
tDH
tSU
VOH2
M
t DM
Figure 27 Interface Timing with External Driver
VCC
2.7 V/4.5 V*2
0.2 V
0.2 V
0.2 V
tOFF*1
trcc
0.1 ms ≤ trcc ≤ 10 ms
tOFF ≥ 1 ms
Notes: 1. tOFF compensates for the power oscillation period caused by momentary power supply
oscillations.
2. Specified at 4.5 V for 5-V operation, and at 2.7 V for 3-V operation.
3. For if 4.5 V is not reached during 5-V operation, the internal reset circuit will not operate
normally.
In this case, the LSI must be initialized by software. (Refer to the Initializing by
Instruction section.)
Figure 28 Internal Power Supply Reset
59
HD44780U
Cautions
1. Hitachi neither warrants nor grants licenses of any rights of Hitachi’s or any third party’s patent,
copyright, trademark, or other intellectual property rights for information contained in this document.
Hitachi bears no responsibility for problems that may arise with third party’s rights, including
intellectual property rights, in connection with use of the information contained in this document.
2. Products and product specifications may be subject to change without notice. Confirm that you have
received the latest product standards or specifications before final design, purchase or use.
3. Hitachi makes every attempt to ensure that its products are of high quality and reliability. However,
contact Hitachi’s sales office before using the product in an application that demands especially high
quality and reliability or where its failure or malfunction may directly threaten human life or cause risk
of bodily injury, such as aerospace, aeronautics, nuclear power, combustion control, transportation,
traffic, safety equipment or medical equipment for life support.
4. Design your application so that the product is used within the ranges guaranteed by Hitachi particularly
for maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation
conditions and other characteristics. Hitachi bears no responsibility for failure or damage when used
beyond the guaranteed ranges. Even within the guaranteed ranges, consider normally foreseeable
failure rates or failure modes in semiconductor devices and employ systemic measures such as failsafes, so that the equipment incorporating Hitachi product does not cause bodily injury, fire or other
consequential damage due to operation of the Hitachi product.
5. This product is not designed to be radiation resistant.
6. No one is permitted to reproduce or duplicate, in any form, the whole or part of this document without
written approval from Hitachi.
7. Contact Hitachi’s sales office for any questions regarding this document or Hitachi semiconductor
products.
Hitachi, Ltd.
Semiconductor & Integrated Circuits.
Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan
Tel: Tokyo (03) 3270-2111 Fax: (03) 3270-5109
URL
NorthAmerica
: http:semiconductor.hitachi.com/
Europe
: http://www.hitachi-eu.com/hel/ecg
Asia (Singapore)
: http://www.has.hitachi.com.sg/grp3/sicd/index.htm
Asia (Taiwan)
: http://www.hitachi.com.tw/E/Product/SICD_Frame.htm
Asia (HongKong) : http://www.hitachi.com.hk/eng/bo/grp3/index.htm
Japan
: http://www.hitachi.co.jp/Sicd/indx.htm
For further information write to:
Hitachi Semiconductor
(America) Inc.
179 East Tasman Drive,
San Jose,CA 95134
Tel: <1> (408) 433-1990
Fax: <1>(408) 433-0223
Hitachi Europe GmbH
Electronic components Group
Dornacher Straße 3
D-85622 Feldkirchen, Munich
Germany
Tel: <49> (89) 9 9180-0
Fax: <49> (89) 9 29 30 00
Hitachi Europe Ltd.
Electronic Components Group.
Whitebrook Park
Lower Cookham Road
Maidenhead
Berkshire SL6 8YA, United Kingdom
Tel: <44> (1628) 585000
Fax: <44> (1628) 778322
Hitachi Asia Pte. Ltd.
16 Collyer Quay #20-00
Hitachi Tower
Singapore 049318
Tel: 535-2100
Fax: 535-1533
Hitachi Asia Ltd.
Taipei Branch Office
3F, Hung Kuo Building. No.167,
Tun-Hwa North Road, Taipei (105)
Tel: <886> (2) 2718-3666
Fax: <886> (2) 2718-8180
Hitachi Asia (Hong Kong) Ltd.
Group III (Electronic Components)
7/F., North Tower, World Finance Centre,
Harbour City, Canton Road, Tsim Sha Tsui,
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: <852> (2) 735 9218
Fax: <852> (2) 730 0281
Telex: 40815 HITEC HX
Copyright © Hitachi, Ltd., 1998. All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.
60
ANEXO F - Datasheet do CI L298
L298

..
..
.
DUAL FULL-BRIDGE DRIVER
OPERATING SUPPLY VOLTAGE UP TO 46 V
TOTAL DC CURRENT UP TO 4 A
LOW SATURATION VOLTAGE
OVERTEMPERATURE PROTECTION
LOGICAL ”0” INPUT VOLTAGE UP TO 1.5 V
(HIGH NOISE IMMUNITY)
DESCRIPTION
The L298 is an integrated monolithic circuit in a 15lead Multiwatt and PowerSO20 packages. It is a
high voltage, high current dual full-bridge driver designed to accept standardTTL logic levels and drive
inductive loads such as relays, solenoids, DC and
stepping motors. Two enableinputs are provided to
enableor disable the deviceindependentlyof the input signals. The emitters of the lower transistors of
each bridge are connected together and the corresponding external terminal can be used for the con-
Multiw att15
PowerSO20
O RDERING NUMBERS : L298N (Multiwatt Vert.)
L298HN (Multiwatt Horiz.)
L298P (PowerSO20)
nectionof an externalsensing resistor. Anadditional
supply input is provided so that the logic works at a
lower voltage.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Jenuary 2000
1/13
L298
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symb ol
Parameter
Value
Unit
VS
Power Supply
50
V
V SS
Logic Supply Voltage
7
V
–0.3 to 7
V
3
2.5
2
A
A
A
VI,Ven
IO
Vsens
Input and Enable Voltage
Peak Output Current (each Channel)
– Non Repetitive (t = 100µs)
–Repetitive (80% on –20% off; ton = 10ms)
–DC Operation
Sensing Voltage
–1 to 2.3
V
25
W
P tot
Total Power Dissipation (Tcase = 75°C)
Top
Junction Operating Temperature
–25 to 130
°C
Storage and Junction Temperature
–40 to 150
°C
Tstg, Tj
PIN CONNECTIONS (top view)
Multiwatt15
15
CURRENT SENSING B
14
OUTPUT 4
13
OUTPUT 3
12
INPUT 4
11
ENABLE B
10
INPUT 3
9
LOGIC SUPPLY VOLTAGE VSS
8
GND
7
INPUT 2
6
ENABLE A
5
INPUT 1
4
SUPPLY VOLTAGE VS
3
OUTPUT 2
2
OUTPUT 1
1
CURRENT SENSING A
TAB CONNECTED TO PIN 8
D95IN240A
GND
1
20
GND
Sense A
2
19
Sense B
N.C.
3
18
N.C.
17
Out 4
16
Out 3
Out 1
4
Out 2
5
VS
6
15
Input 4
Input 1
7
14
Enable B
Enable A
8
13
Input 3
Input 2
9
12
VSS
10
11
GND
GND
PowerSO20
D95IN239
THERMAL DATA
Symb ol
Po werSO20
Mu ltiwatt15
Unit
Rth j-case
Thermal Resistance Junction-case
Parameter
Max.
–
3
°C/W
Rth j-amb
Thermal Resistance Junction-ambient
Max.
13 (*)
35
°C/W
(*) Mounted on aluminum substrate
2/13
L298
PIN FUNCTIONS (refer to the block diagram)
MW.15
Po werSO
Name
1;15
2;19
Sense A; Sense B
Between this pin and ground is connected the sense resistor to
control the current of the load.
Fun ction
2;3
4;5
Out 1; Out 2
Outputs of the Bridge A; the current that flows through the load
connected between these two pins is monitored at pin 1.
4
6
VS
Supply Voltage for the Power Output Stages.
A non-inductive 100nF capacitor must be connected between this
pin and ground.
5;7
7;9
Input 1; Input 2
6;11
8;14
Enable A; Enable B
TTL Compatible Inputs of the Bridge A.
8
1,10,11,20
GND
Ground.
9
12
VSS
Supply Voltage for the Logic Blocks. A100nF capacitor must be
connected between this pin and ground.
10; 12
13;15
Input 3; Input 4
13; 14
16;17
Out 3; Out 4
–
3;18
N.C.
TTL Compatible Enable Input: the L state disables the bridge A
(enable A) and/or the bridge B (enable B).
TTL Compatible Inputs of the Bridge B.
Outputs of the Bridge B. The current that flows through the load
connected between these two pins is monitored at pin 15.
Not Connected
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (VS = 42V; VSS = 5V, Tj = 25°C; unless otherwise specified)
Symbol
Parameter
VS
Supply Voltage (pin 4)
VSS
Logic Supply Voltage (pin 9)
Test Co nditions
Operative Condition
Min .
4.5
Ven = H; IL = 0
Typ .
VIH +2.5
Unit
46
V
5
7
V
13
50
22
70
mA
mA
4
mA
24
7
36
12
mA
mA
6
mA
1.5
V
IS
Quiescent Supply Current (pin 4)
ISS
Quiescent Current from VSS (pin 9) Ven = H; IL = 0
V iL
Input Low Voltage
(pins 5, 7, 10, 12)
–0.3
ViH
Input High Voltage
(pins 5, 7, 10, 12)
2.3
VSS
V
IiL
Low Voltage Input Current
(pins 5, 7, 10, 12)
Vi = L
–10
µA
IiH
High Voltage Input Current
(pins 5, 7, 10, 12)
Vi = H ≤ VSS –0.6V
100
µA
Ven = L
Vi = L
Vi = H
Max.
Vi = X
Ven = L
Vi = L
Vi = H
Vi = X
30
Ven = L
Enable Low Voltage (pins 6, 11)
–0.3
1.5
V
Ven = H
Enable High Voltage (pins 6, 11)
2.3
VSS
V
Ien = L
Low Voltage Enable Current
(pins 6, 11)
Ven = L
–10
µA
Ien = H
High Voltage Enable Current
(pins 6, 11)
Ven = H ≤ VSS –0.6V
30
100
µA
0.95
1.35
2
1.7
2.7
V
V
1.2
1.7
1.6
2.3
V
V
VCEsat (H) Source Saturation Voltage
IL = 1A
IL = 2A
VCEsat (L) Sink Saturation Voltage
IL = 1A
IL = 2A
(5)
(5)
0.85
IL = 1A
IL = 2A
(5)
(5)
1.80
3.2
4.9
V
V
–1 (1)
2
V
VCEsat
Total Drop
Vsens
Sensing Voltage (pins 1, 15)
3/13
L298
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (continued)
Symbol
Parameter
Test Co nditions
Min .
Typ .
Max.
Unit
T1 (Vi)
Source Current Turn-off Delay
0.5 V i to 0.9 I L
(2); (4)
1.5
µs
T2 (Vi)
Source Current Fall Time
0.9 IL to 0.1 IL
(2); (4)
0.2
µs
T3 (Vi)
Source Current Turn-on Delay
0.5 V i to 0.1 I L
(2); (4)
2
µs
T4 (Vi)
Source Current Rise Time
0.1 IL to 0.9 IL
(2); (4)
0.7
µs
T5 (Vi)
Sink Current Turn-off Delay
0.5 V i to 0.9 I L
(3); (4)
0.7
µs
T6 (Vi)
Sink Current Fall Time
0.9 IL to 0.1 IL
(3); (4)
0.25
µs
T7 (Vi)
Sink Current Turn-on Delay
0.5 V i to 0.9 I L
(3); (4)
1.6
µs
T8 (Vi)
Sink Current Rise Time
0.1 IL to 0.9 IL
(3); (4)
0.2
µs
fc (Vi)
Commutation Frequency
IL = 2A
T1 (Ven)
Source Current Turn-off Delay
0.5 V en to 0.9 IL
25
T2 (Ven)
Source Current Fall Time
0.9 IL to 0.1 IL
T3 (Ven)
Source Current Turn-on Delay
0.5 V en to 0.1 IL
T4 (Ven)
Source Current Rise Time
0.1 IL to 0.9 IL
T5 (Ven)
Sink Current Turn-off Delay
0.5 V en to 0.9 IL
(2); (4)
(2); (4)
(2); (4)
(2); (4)
T6 (Ven)
Sink Current Fall Time
0.9 IL to 0.1 IL
T7 (Ven)
Sink Current Turn-on Delay
0.5 V en to 0.9 IL
T8 (Ven)
Sink Current Rise Time
0.1 IL to 0.9 IL
(3); (4)
(3); (4)
(3); (4)
(3); (4)
40
µs
1
µs
0.3
µs
0.4
µs
2.2
µs
0.35
µs
0.25
µs
0.1
µs
1) 1)Sensing voltage can be –1 V for t ≤ 50 µsec; in steady state V sens min ≥ – 0.5 V.
2) See fig. 2.
3) See fig. 4.
4) The load must be a pure resistor.
Figure 1 : Typical Saturation Voltage vs. Output
Current.
Figure 2 : Switching Times Test Circuits.
Note : For INPUT Switching, set EN = H
For ENABLESwitching, set IN = H
4/13
KHz
3
L298
Figure 3 : Source Current Delay Times vs. Input or Enable Switching.
Figure 4 : Switching Times Test Circuits.
Note : For INPUT Switching, set EN = H
For ENABLE Switching, set IN = L
5/13
L298
Figure 5 : Sink Current Delay Times vs. Input 0 V Enable Switching.
Figure 6 : Bidirectional DC Motor Control.
In pu ts
Ven = H
Ven = L
L = Low
6/13
Fu nctio n
C=H;D=L
Forward
C =L; D= H
Reverse
C=D
Fast Motor Stop
C=X;D=X
Free Running
Motor Stop
H = High
X = Don’t care
L298
Figure 7 : For higher currents, outputs can be paralleled. Take care to parallel channel 1 with channel 4
and channel 2 with channel 3.
APPLICATION INFORMATION (Refer to the block diagram)
1.1. POWER OUTPUT STAGE
Each input must be connected to the source of the
driving signals by means of a very short path.
TheL298integratestwo poweroutputstages(A ; B).
The power output stage is a bridge configuration
Turn-On and Turn-Off : Before to Turn-ON the Supand its outputs can drive an inductive load in comply Voltageand beforeto Turnit OFF, the Enableinmon or differenzialmode, dependingon the state of
put must be driven to the Low state.
the inputs. The current that flows through the load
3. APPLICATIONS
comes out from the bridge at the sense output : an
Fig 6 shows a bidirectional DC motor control Scheexternal resistor (RSA ; RSB.) allows to detect the inmatic Diagram for which only one bridge is needed.
tensity of this current.
The external bridge of diodes D1 to D4 is made by
1.2. INPUT STAGE
four fast recovery elements (trr ≤ 200 nsec) that
Each bridge is driven by means of four gates the inmust be chosen of a VF as low as possible at the
put of which are In1 ; In2 ; EnA and In3 ; In4 ; EnB.
worst case of the load current.
The In inputs set the bridge state when The En input
The sense outputvoltage can be used to control the
is high ; a lowstate of the En inputinhibitsthe bridge.
current amplitude by chopping the inputs, or to proAll the inputs are TTL compatible.
vide overcurrent protection by switching low the enable input.
2. SUGGESTIONS
The brake function (Fast motor stop) requires that
A non inductive capacitor, usually of 100 nF, must
the Absolute Maximum Rating of 2 Amps must
be foreseen between both Vs and Vss, to ground,
never be overcome.
as near as possible to GND pin. When the large capacitor of the power supply is too far from the IC, a
When the repetitive peak current needed from the
second smaller one must be foreseen near the
load is higher than 2 Amps, a paralleled configuraL298.
tion can be chosen (See Fig.7).
The sense resistor, not of a wire wound type, must
An external bridge of diodes are required when inbe grounded near the negative pole of Vs that must
ductive loads are driven and when the inputs of the
be near the GND pin of the I.C.
IC are chopped; Shottkydiodeswould be preferred.
7/13
L298
This solution can drive until 3 Amps In DC operation
and until 3.5 Amps of a repetitive peak current.
OnFig 8 it is shownthe driving ofa twophasebipolar
stepper motor ; the needed signals to drive the inputs of the L298 are generated, in this example,
from the IC L297.
Fig 9 shows an example of P.C.B. designed for the
application of Fig 8.
Fig 10 shows a second two phase bipolar stepper
motor control circuit where the current is controlled
by the I.C. L6506.
Figure 8 : Two Phase Bipolar Stepper Motor Circuit.
This circuit drives bipolar stepper motors with winding currents up to 2 A. The diodes are fast 2 A types.
RS1 = RS2 = 0.5 Ω
D1 to D8 = 2 A Fast diodes
8/13
{
VF ≤ 1.2 V @ I = 2 A
trr ≤ 200 ns
L298
Figure 9 : Suggested Printed Circuit Board Layout for the Circuit of fig. 8 (1:1 scale).
Figure 10 : Two Phase Bipolar Stepper Motor Control Circuit by Using the Current Controller L6506.
RR and Rsense depend from the load current
9/13
L298
mm
DIM.
MIN.
TYP.
inch
MAX.
MIN.
TYP.
MAX.
A
5
B
2.65
0.104
C
1.6
0.063
D
0.197
1
0.039
E
0.49
0.55
0.019
F
0.66
0.75
0.026
G
1.02
1.27
1.52
0.040
0.050
0.060
G1
17.53
17.78
18.03
0.690
0.700
0.710
H1
19.6
0.022
0.030
0.772
H2
20.2
0.795
L
21.9
22.2
22.5
0.862
0.874
0.886
L1
21.7
22.1
22.5
0.854
0.870
0.886
L2
17.65
18.1
0.695
L3
17.25
17.5
17.75
0.679
0.689
0.699
L4
10.3
10.7
10.9
0.406
0.421
0.429
L7
2.65
2.9
0.104
0.713
0.114
M
4.25
4.55
4.85
0.167
0.179
0.191
M1
4.63
5.08
5.53
0.182
0.200
0.218
S
1.9
2.6
0.075
S1
1.9
2.6
0.075
0.102
Dia1
3.65
3.85
0.144
0.152
10/13
OUTLINE AND
MECHANICAL DATA
0.102
Multiwatt15 V
L298
mm
DIM.
MIN.
TYP.
inch
MAX.
MIN.
TYP.
MAX.
A
5
0.197
B
2.65
0.104
C
1.6
0.063
E
0.49
0.55
0.019
0.022
F
0.66
0.75
0.026
0.030
G
1.14
1.27
1.4
0.045
0.050
0.055
G1
17.57
17.78
17.91
0.692
0.700
0.705
H1
19.6
0.772
H2
20.2
0.795
L
20.57
0.810
L1
18.03
0.710
L2
2.54
0.100
L3
17.25
17.5
17.75
0.679
0.689
0.699
L4
10.3
10.7
10.9
0.406
0.421
0.429
L5
5.28
L6
OUTLINE AND
MECHANICAL DATA
0.208
0.094
2.38
L7
2.65
2.9
0.104
0.114
S
1.9
2.6
0.075
0.102
S1
1.9
2.6
0.075
0.102
Dia1
3.65
3.85
0.144
0.152
Multiwatt15 H
11/13
L298
DIM.
A
a1
a2
a3
b
c
D (1)
D1
E
e
e3
E1 (1)
E2
E3
G
H
h
L
N
S
T
MIN.
mm
TYP.
0.1
0
0.4
0.23
15.8
9.4
13.9
MAX.
3.6
0.3
3.3
0.1
0.53
0.32
16
9.8
14.5
MIN.
0.004
0.000
0.016
0.009
0.622
0.370
0.547
1.27
11.43
10.9
inch
TYP.
0.050
0.450
11.1 0.429
2.9
6.2
0.228
0.1
0.000
15.9 0.610
1.1
1.1
0.031
10° (max.)
8° (max.)
5.8
0
15.5
0.8
OUTLINE AND
MECHANICAL DATA
MAX.
0.142
0.012
0.130
0.004
0.021
0.013
0.630
0.386
0.570
10
0.437
0.114
0.244
0.004
0.626
0.043
0.043
JEDEC MO-166
0.394
PowerSO20
(1) ”D and F” do not include mold flash or protrusions.
- Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed 0.15 mm (0.006”).
- Critical dimensions: ”E”, ”G” and ”a3”
N
R
N
a2
b
A
e
DETAIL A
c
a1
DETAIL B
E
e3
H
DETAIL A
lead
D
slug
a3
DETAIL B
20
11
0.35
Gage Plane
-C-
S
SEATING PLANE
L
G
E2
E1
BOTTOM VIEW
T
E3
1
h x 45
12/13
10
PSO20MEC
C
(COPLANARITY)
D1
L298
Information furnished is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, STMicroelectronics assumes no responsibility for the consequences of use of such information nor for any infringement of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use. No
license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of STMicroelectronics. Specification mentioned in this
publication are subject to change without notice. This publication supersedes and replaces all information previously supplied. STMicroelectronics products are not authorized for use as critical components in life support devices or systems without express written
approval of STMicroelectronics.
The ST logo is a registered trademark of STMicroelectronics
 2000 STMicroelectronics – Printed in Italy – All Rights Reserved
STMicroelectronics GROUP OF COMPANIES
Australia - Brazil - China - Finland - France - Germany - Hong Kong - India - Italy - Japan - Malaysia - Malta - Morocco Singapore - Spain - Sweden - Switzerland - United Kingdom - U.S.A.
http://www.st.com
13/13
ANEXO G - Datasheet do regulador de tensão LM7805
LM78XX/LM78XXA
3-Terminal 1A Positive Voltage Regulator
Features
•
•
•
•
•
General Description
Output Current up to 1A
Output Voltages of 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 18, 24
Thermal Overload Protection
Short Circuit Protection
Output Transistor Safe Operating Area Protection
The LM78XX series of three terminal positive regulators
are available in the TO-220 package and with several
fixed output voltages, making them useful in a wide
range of applications. Each type employs internal current
limiting, thermal shut down and safe operating area protection, making it essentially indestructible. If adequate
heat sinking is provided, they can deliver over 1A output
current. Although designed primarily as fixed voltage
regulators, these devices can be used with external components to obtain adjustable voltages and currents.
Ordering Information
Product Number
Output Voltage Tolerance
Package
Operating Temperature
LM7805CT
±4%
TO-220
-40 C to +125 C
LM7806CT
LM7808CT
LM7809CT
LM7810CT
LM7812CT
LM7815CT
LM7818CT
LM7824CT
LM7805ACT
0 C to +125 C
±2%
LM7806ACT
LM7808ACT
LM7809ACT
LM7810ACT
LM7812ACT
LM7815ACT
LM7818ACT
LM7824ACT
© 2010 Fairchild Semiconductor Corporation
LM78XX/LM78XXA Rev. 1.0
www.fairchildsemi.com
1
LM78XX/LM78XXA — 3-Terminal 1A Positive Voltage Regulator
April 2010
LM78XX/LM78XXA 3-Terminal 1A Positive Voltage Regulator
Block Diagram
Input
Series Pass
Element
1
Current
Generator
Starting
Circuit
Output
3
SOA
Protection
Reference
Voltage
Error
Amplifier
Thermal
Protection
GND
2
Figure 1.
Pin Assignment
TO-220
GND
1. Input
2. GND
3. Output
1
Figure 2.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Absolute maximum ratings are those values beyond which damage to the device may occur. The datasheet
specifications should be met, without exception, to ensure that the system design is reliable over its power supply,
temperature, and output/input loading variables. Fairchild does not recommend operation outside datasheet
specifications.
Symbol
VI
Parameter
Input Voltage
Value
Unit
VO = 5V to 18V
35
V
VO = 24V
40
V
RθJC
Thermal Resistance Junction-Cases (TO-220)
5
°C/W
RθJA
Thermal Resistance Junction-Air (TO-220)
65
°C/W
TOPR
Operating Temperature
Range
-40 to +125
°C
TSTG
LM78xx
LM78xxA
Storage Temperature Range
-65 to +150
2
0 to +125
°C
Refer to the test circuits. -40°C < TJ < 125°C, IO = 500mA, VI = 10V, CI = 0.1µF, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol
VO
Regline
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(1)
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
TJ = +25°C
Conditions
4.8
5.0
5.2
V
5mA ≤ IO ≤ 1A, PO ≤ 15W,
VI = 7V to 20V
4.75
5.0
5.25
VO = 7V to 25V
–
4.0
100
VI = 8V to 12V
–
1.6
50.0
IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
9.0
100
TJ = +25°C
Regulation(1)
TJ = +25°C
Quiescent Current
TJ = +25°C
Regload Load
IO = 250mA to 750mA
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
VN
RR
VDROP
mV
mV
–
4.0
50.0
–
5.0
8.0
mA
Quiescent Current Change IO = 5mA to 1A
–
0.03
0.5
mA
VI = 7V to 25V
–
0.3
1.3
IO = 5mA
–
-0.8
–
mV/°C
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
42.0
–
µV/VO
62.0
73.0
–
dB
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
f = 1kHz
–
15.0
–
mΩ
Output Voltage
Drift(2)
Output Noise Voltage
Ripple
Rejection(2)
Dropout Voltage
Resistance(2)
f = 120Hz, VO = 8V to 18V
rO
Output
ISC
Short Circuit Current
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
230
–
mA
IPK
Peak Current(2)
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
Notes:
1. Load and line regulation are specified at constant junction temperature. Changes in VO due to heating effects must
be taken into account separately. Pulse testing with low duty is used.
2. These parameters, although guaranteed, are not 100% tested in production.
3
Electrical Characteristics (LM7805)
Refer to the test circuits. -40°C < TJ < 125°C, IO = 500mA, VI = 11V, CI = 0.33µF, CO = 0.1µF, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol
VO
Parameter
Conditions
Output Voltage
Min
Typ.
Max.
Unit
TJ = +25°C
5.75
6.0
6.25
V
5mA ≤ IO ≤ 1A, PO ≤ 15W,
VI = 8.0V to 21V
5.7
6.0
6.3
VI = 8V to 25V
–
5.0
120
VI = 9V to 13V
–
1.5
60.0
IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
9.0
120
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
3.0
60.0
Regline
Line Regulation(3)
TJ = +25°C
Regload
Load Regulation(3)
TJ = +25°C
mV
mV
IQ
Quiescent Current
TJ = +25°C
–
5.0
8.0
mA
∆IQ
Quiescent Current
Change
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 8V to 25V
–
–
1.3
Output Voltage Drift
IO = 5mA
–
-0.8
–
mV/°C
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
45.0
–
µV/VO
62.0
73.0
–
dB
∆VO/∆T
VN
RR
(4)
Ripple
Rejection(4)
f = 120Hz, VO = 8V to 18V
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
rO
Output Resistance(4)
f = 1kHz
–
19.0
–
mΩ
ISC
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
IPK
Current(4)
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
Peak
Notes:
4
Electrical Characteristics (LM7806) (Continued)
Symbol
VO
Regline
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(5)
Regload Load Regulation(5)
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
VN
RR
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
TJ = +25°C
7.7
8.0
8.3
V
5mA ≤ IO ≤ 1A, PO ≤ 15W,
VI = 10.5V to 23V
7.6
8.0
8.4
–
5.0
160
TJ = +25°C
TJ = +25°C
VI = 10.5V to 25V
VI = 11.5V to 17V
–
2.0
80.0
IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
10.0
160
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
5.0
80.0
mV
mV
Quiescent Current
TJ = +25°C
–
5.0
8.0
mA
Quiescent Current Change
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
0.05
0.5
mA
VI = 10.5V to 25V
–
0.5
1.0
IO = 5mA
–
-0.8
–
mV/°C
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
52.0
–
µV/VO
f = 120Hz, VO = 11.5V to 21.5V
56.0
73.0
–
dB
Output Voltage
Drift(6)
Ripple
Rejection(6)
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
rO
f = 1kHz
–
17.0
–
mΩ
ISC
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
230
–
mA
IPK
Current(6)
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
Peak
Notes:
5
Symbol
VO
Regline
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(7)
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
TJ = +25°C
8.65
9.0
9.35
V
5mA ≤ IO ≤ 1A, PO ≤ 15W,
VI = 11.5V to 24V
8.6
9.0
9.4
–
6.0
180
–
2.0
90.0
–
12.0
180
–
4.0
90.0
–
5.0
8.0
mA
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 11.5V to 26V
–
–
1.3
IO = 5mA
–
-1.0
–
mV/°C
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
58.0
–
µV/VO
56.0
71.0
–
dB
TJ = +25°C VI = 11.5V to 25V
VI = 12V to 17V
TJ = +25°C IO = 5mA to 1.5A
IO = 250mA to 750mA
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
VN
RR
Quiescent Current
TJ = +25°C
Output Voltage
Drift(8)
Ripple
Rejection(8)
f = 120Hz, VO = 13V to 23V
mV
mV
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
rO
f = 1kHz
–
17.0
–
mΩ
ISC
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
IPK
Current(8)
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
Peak
Notes:
6
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
TJ = +25°C
9.6
10.0
10.4
V
5mA ≤ IO ≤ 1A, PO ≤ 15W,
VI = 12.5V to 25V
9.5
10.0
10.5
VI = 12.5V to 25V
–
10.0
200
VI = 13V to 25V
–
3.0
100
IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
12.0
200
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
4.0
400
–
5.1
8.0
mA
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 12.5V to 29V
–
–
1.0
Output Voltage Drift(10)
IO = 5mA
–
-1.0
–
mV/°C
VN
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
58.0
–
µV/VO
RR
Ripple Rejection(10)
f = 120Hz, VO = 13V to 23V
56.0
71.0
–
dB
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
rO
f = 1kHz
–
17.0
–
mΩ
ISC
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
IPK
Peak Current(10)
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VO
Regline
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(9)
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
VDROP
Quiescent Current
Conditions
TJ = +25°C
TJ = +25°C
TJ = +25°C
mV
mV
Notes:
7
Symbol
VO
Parameter
Output Voltage
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
TJ = +25°C
11.5
12.0
12.5
V
5mA ≤ IO ≤ 1A, PO ≤ 15W,
VI = 14.5V to 27V
11.4
12.0
12.6
–
10.0
240
–
3.0
120
–
11.0
240
–
5.0
120
–
5.1
8.0
mA
–
0.1
0.5
mA
VI = 14.5V to 30V
–
0.5
1.0
IO = 5mA
–
-1.0
–
mV/°C
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
76.0
–
µV/VO
55.0
71.0
–
dB
Regline
Line Regulation(11)
TJ = +25°C VI = 14.5V to 30V
Regload
Load Regulation(11)
TJ = +25°C IO = 5mA to 1.5A
VI = 16V to 22V
IO = 250mA to 750mA
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
VN
RR
Quiescent Current
TJ = +25°C
Output Voltage
Drift(12)
Ripple
Rejection(12)
f = 120Hz, VI = 15V to 25V
mV
mV
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
rO
f = 1kHz
–
18.0
–
mΩ
ISC
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
230
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
IPK
Peak
Current(12)
Notes:
8
Symbol
VO
Regline
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(13)
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
TJ = +25°C
14.4
15.0
15.6
V
5mA ≤ IO ≤ 1A, PO ≤ 15W,
VI = 17.5V to 30V
14.25
15.0
15.75
–
11.0
300
–
3.0
150
–
12.0
300
–
4.0
150
–
5.2
8.0
mA
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 17.5V to 30V
–
–
1.0
IO = 5mA
–
-1.0
–
mV/°C
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
90.0
–
µV/VO
f = 120Hz, VI = 18.5V to 28.5V
54.0
70.0
–
dB
TJ = +25°C VI = 17.5V to 30V
VI = 20V to 26V
TJ = +25°C IO = 5mA to 1.5A
IO = 250mA to 750mA
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
VN
RR
Quiescent Current
TJ = +25°C
Output Voltage
Drift(14)
Ripple
Rejection(14)
mV
mV
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
rO
f = 1kHz
–
19.0
–
mΩ
ISC
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
IPK
Peak
Current(14)
Notes:
9
Symbol
VO
Regline
Parameter
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
TJ = +25°C
17.3
18.0
18.7
V
5mA ≤ IO ≤ 1A, PO ≤ 15W,
VI = 21V to 33V
17.1
18.0
18.9
TJ = +25°C VI = 21V to 33V
–
15.0
360
VI = 24V to 30V
–
5.0
180
–
15.0
360
–
5.0
180
–
5.2
8.0
mA
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 21V to 33V
–
–
1.0
IO = 5mA
–
-1.0
–
mV/°C
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
110
–
µV/VO
53.0
69.0
–
dB
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(15)
Conditions
TJ = +25°C IO = 5mA to 1.5A
IO = 250mA to 750mA
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
VN
RR
Quiescent Current
Output Voltage
Drift(16)
Ripple
Rejection(16)
TJ = +25°C
f = 120Hz, VI = 22V to 32V
mV
mV
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
rO
f = 1kHz
–
22.0
–
mΩ
ISC
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
IPK
Peak
Current(16)
Notes:
10
Symbol
VO
Regline
Parameter
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
TJ = +25°C
23.0
24.0
25.0
V
5mA ≤ IO ≤ 1A, PO ≤ 15W,
VI = 27V to 38V
22.8
24.0
25.25
VI = 27V to 38V
–
17.0
480
VI = 30V to 36V
–
6.0
240
IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
15.0
480
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
5.0
240
–
5.2
8.0
mA
–
0.1
0.5
mA
VI = 27V to 38V
–
0.5
1.0
IO = 5mA
–
-1.5
–
mV/°C
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
60.0
–
µV/VO
50.0
67.0
–
dB
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(17)
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
VN
RR
Quiescent Current
Output Voltage
Drift(18)
Ripple
Rejection(18)
Conditions
TJ = +25°C
TJ = +25°C
TJ = +25°C
f = 120Hz, VI = 28V to 38V
mV
mV
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
rO
f = 1kHz
–
28.0
–
mΩ
ISC
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
230
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
IPK
Peak
Current(18)
Notes:
11
Symbol
VO
Regline
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(19)
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
TJ = +25°C
Conditions
4.9
5.0
5.1
V
IO = 5mA to 1A, PO ≤ 15W,
VI = 7.5V to 20V
4.8
5.0
5.2
VI = 7.5V to 25V, IO = 500mA
–
5.0
50.0
VI = 8V to 12V
–
3.0
50.0
VI = 7.3V to 20V
–
5.0
50.0
VI = 8V to 12V
TJ = +25°C
–
1.5
25.0
TJ = +25°C, IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
9.0
100
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
9.0
100
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
4.0
50.0
mV
mV
IQ
Quiescent Current
TJ = +25°C
–
5.0
6.0
mA
∆IQ
Quiescent Current
Change
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 8V to 25V, IO = 500mA
–
–
0.8
VI = 7.5V to 20V, TJ = +25°C
–
–
0.8
IO = 5mA
–
-0.8
–
mV/°C
∆VO/∆T
Output Voltage
Drift(20)
VN
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
10.0
–
µV/VO
RR
f = 120Hz, IO = 500mA, VI = 8V to 18V
–
68.0
–
dB
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
f = 1kHz
–
17.0
–
mΩ
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
Resistance(20)
rO
Output
ISC
IPK
Peak
Current(20)
Notes:
12
Electrical Characteristics (LM7805A) (Continued)
Refer to the test circuits. 0°C < TJ < 125°C, IO = 1A, VI = 10V, CI = 0.33µF, CO = 0.1µF, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol
VO
Regline
Regload
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(21)
Load Regulation(21)
Quiescent Current
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
TJ = +25°C
Conditions
5.58
6.0
6.12
V
VI = 8.6V to 21V
5.76
6.0
6.24
VI = 8.6V to 25V, IO = 500mA
–
5.0
60.0
VI = 9V to 13V
–
3.0
60.0
TJ = +25°C
VI = 8.3V to 21V
–
5.0
60.0
VI = 9V to 13V
–
1.5
30.0
TJ = +25°C, IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
9.0
100
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
9.0
100
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
5.0
50.0
TJ = +25°C
–
4.3
6.0
mA
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 19V to 25V, IO = 500mA
–
–
0.8
VI = 8.5V to 21V, TJ = +25°C
–
–
0.8
IO = 5mA
–
-0.8
–
mV/°C
Output Voltage
Drift(22)
mV
mV
VN
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
10.0
–
µV/VO
RR
f = 120Hz, IO = 500mA, VI = 9V to 19V
–
65.0
–
dB
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
f = 1kHz
–
17.0
–
mΩ
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
Resistance(22)
rO
Output
ISC
IPK
Peak
Current(22)
Notes:
13
Symbol
VO
Regline
Regload
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(23)
Load Regulation(23)
Quiescent Current
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
TJ = +25°C
Conditions
7.84
8.0
8.16
V
VI = 10.6V to 23V
7.7
8.0
8.3
VI = 10.6V to 25V, IO = 500mA
–
6.0
80.0
VI = 11V to 17V
–
3.0
80.0
TJ = +25°C
VI = 10.4V to 23V
–
6.0
80.0
VI = 11V to 17V
–
2.0
40.0
TJ = +25°C, IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
12.0
100
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
12.0
100
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
5.0
50.0
TJ = +25°C
–
5.0
6.0
mA
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 11V to 25V, IO = 500mA
–
–
0.8
VI = 10.6V to 23V, TJ = +25°C
–
–
0.8
IO = 5mA
–
-0.8
–
mV/°C
Output Voltage
Drift(24)
mV
mV
VN
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
10.0
–
µV/VO
RR
f = 120Hz, IO = 500mA,
VI = 11.5V to 21.5V
–
62.0
–
dB
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
f = 1kHz
–
18.0
–
mΩ
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
Resistance(24)
rO
Output
ISC
IPK
Peak
Current(24)
Notes:
14
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Units
TJ = +25°C
8.82
9.0
9.16
V
VI = 11.2V to 24V
8.65
9.0
9.35
VI = 11.7V to 25V, IO = 500mA
–
6.0
90.0
VI = 12.5V to 19V
–
4.0
45.0
TJ = +25°C
VI = 11.5V to 24V
–
6.0
90.0
VI = 12.5V to 19V
–
2.0
45.0
TJ = +25°C, IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
12.0
100
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
12.0
100
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
5.0
50.0
TJ = +25°C
–
5.0
6.0
mA
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 12V to 25V, IO = 500mA
–
–
0.8
VI = 11.7V to 25V, TJ = +25°C
–
–
0.8
IO = 5mA
–
-1.0
–
mV/°C
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
10.0
–
µV/VO
f = 120Hz, IO = 500mA,
VI = 12V to 22V
–
62.0
–
dB
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
rO
f = 1kHz
–
17.0
–
mΩ
ISC
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VO
Regline
Regload
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
VN
RR
VDROP
IPK
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(25)
Load
Regulation(25)
Quiescent Current
Conditions
Output Voltage
Drift(26)
Ripple
Peak
Rejection(26)
Current(26)
mV
mV
Notes:
15
Symbol
VO
Regline
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(27)
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Units
TJ = +25°C
Conditions
9.8
10.0
10.2
V
VI = 12.8V to 25V
9.6
10.0
10.4
VI = 12.8V to 26V, IO = 500mA
–
8.0
100
VI = 13V to 20V
–
4.0
50.0
VI = 12.5V to 25V
–
8.0
100
VI = 13V to 20V
TJ = +25°C
Regload
Load Regulation(27)
mV
–
3.0
50.0
TJ = +25°C, IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
12.0
100
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
12.0
100
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
5.0
50.0
mV
IQ
Quiescent Current
TJ = +25°C
–
5.0
6.0
mA
∆IQ
Quiescent Current
Change
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 12.8V to 25V, IO = 500mA
–
–
0.8
VI = 13V to 26V, TJ = +25°C
–
–
0.5
IO = 5mA
–
-1.0
–
mV/°C
∆VO/∆T
Output Voltage
Drift(28)
VN
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
10.0
–
µV/VO
RR
f = 120Hz, IO = 500mA, VI = 14V to 24V
–
62.0
–
dB
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
f = 1kHz
–
17.0
–
mΩ
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
Resistance(28)
rO
Output
ISC
IPK
Peak
Current(28)
Notes:
16
Symbol
VO
Regline
Regload
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(29)
Load Regulation(29)
Quiescent Current
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Units
TJ = +25°C
Conditions
11.75
12.0
12.25
V
VI = 14.8V to 27V
11.5
12.0
12.5
VI = 14.8V to 30V, IO = 500mA
–
10.0
120
VI = 16V to 22V
–
4.0
120
TJ = +25°C
VI = 14.5V to 27V
–
10.0
120
VI = 16V to 22V
–
3.0
60.0
TJ = +25°C, IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
12.0
100
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
12.0
100
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
5.0
50.0
TJ = +25°C
–
5.1
6.0
mA
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 14V to 27V, IO = 500mA
–
–
0.8
VI = 15V to 30V, TJ = +25°C
–
–
0.8
IO = 5mA
–
-1.0
–
mV/°C
Output Voltage
Drift(30)
mV
mV
VN
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
10.0
–
µV/VO
RR
f = 120Hz, IO = 500mA,
VI = 14V to 24V
–
60.0
–
dB
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
f = 1kHz
–
18.0
–
mΩ
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
Resistance(30)
rO
Output
ISC
IPK
Peak
Current(30)
Note:
17
Symbol
VO
Regline
Regload
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(31)
Load Regulation(31)
Quiescent Current
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Units
TJ = +25°C
Conditions
14.75
15.0
15.3
V
VI = 17.7V to 30V
14.4
15.0
15.6
VI = 17.4V to 30V, IO = 500mA
–
10.0
150
VI = 20V to 26V
–
5.0
150
TJ = +25°C VI = 17.5V to 30V
–
11.0
150
VI = 20V to 26V
–
3.0
75.0
TJ = +25°C, IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
12.0
100
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
12.0
100
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
5.0
50.0
TJ = +25°C
–
5.2
6.0
mA
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 17.5V to 30V, IO = 500mA
–
–
0.8
VI = 17.5V to 30V, TJ = +25°C
–
–
0.8
IO = 5mA
–
-1.0
–
mV/°C
Output Voltage
Drift(32)
mV
mV
VN
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
10.0
–
µV/VO
RR
f = 120Hz, IO = 500mA,
VI = 18.5V to 28.5V
–
58.0
–
dB
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
f = 1kHz
–
19.0
–
mΩ
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
Resistance(32)
rO
Output
ISC
IPK
Peak
Current(32)
Notes:
18
Symbol
VO
Regline
Regload
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(33)
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Units
TJ = +25°C
Conditions
17.64
18.0
18.36
V
VI = 21V to 33V
17.3
18.0
18.7
VI = 21V to 33V, IO = 500mA
–
15.0
180
VI = 21V to 33V
–
5.0
180
TJ = +25°C
VI = 20.6V to 33V
–
15.0
180
mV
VI = 24V to 30V
–
5.0
90.0
TJ = +25°C, IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
15.0
100
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
15.0
100
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
7.0
50.0
Quiescent Current
TJ = +25°C
–
5.2
6.0
mA
Quiescent Current Change
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 12V to 33V, IO = 500mA
–
–
0.8
VI = 12V to 33V, TJ = +25°C
–
–
0.8
IO = 5mA
–
-1.0
–
mV/°C
Load Regulation(33)
Output Voltage
Drift(34)
mV
VN
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
10.0
–
µV/VO
RR
f = 120Hz, IO = 500mA,
VI = 22V to 32V
–
57.0
–
dB
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
f = 1kHz
–
19.0
–
mΩ
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
Resistance(34)
rO
Output
ISC
IPK
Peak
Current(34)
Notes:
19
Symbol
VO
Regline
Parameter
Output Voltage
Line Regulation(35)
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Units
TJ = +25°C
Conditions
23.5
24.0
24.5
V
VI = 27.3V to 38V
23.0
24.0
25.0
VI = 27V to 38V, IO = 500mA
–
18.0
240
VI = 21V to 33V
–
6.0
240
VI = 26.7V to 38V
–
18.0
240
VI = 30V to 36V
TJ = +25°C
Regload
IQ
∆IQ
∆VO/∆T
Load Regulation(35)
Quiescent Current
–
6.0
120
TJ = +25°C, IO = 5mA to 1.5A
–
15.0
100
IO = 5mA to 1A
–
15.0
100
IO = 250mA to 750mA
–
7.0
50.0
TJ = +25°C
–
5.2
6.0
mA
–
–
0.5
mA
VI = 27.3V to 38V, IO = 500mA
–
–
0.8
VI = 27.3V to 38V, TJ = +25°C
–
–
0.8
IO = 5mA
–
-1.5
–
mV/°C
Output Voltage
Drift(36)
mV
mV
VN
f = 10Hz to 100kHz, TA = +25°C
–
10.0
–
µV/VO
RR
f = 120Hz, IO = 500mA,
VI = 28V to 38V
–
54.0
–
dB
Dropout Voltage
IO = 1A, TJ = +25°C
–
2.0
–
V
f = 1kHz
–
20.0
–
mΩ
VI = 35V, TA = +25°C
–
250
–
mA
TJ = +25°C
–
2.2
–
A
VDROP
Resistance(36)
rO
Output
ISC
IPK
Peak
Current(36)
Notes:
20
3
VI = 10V
VO = 5V
IO = 5mA
5.75
TJ = 25°C
∆VO = 100mV
2.5
OUTPUT CURRENT (A)
QUIESCENT CURRENT (mA)
6
5.5
5.25
5
4.75
2
1.5
1
.5
4.5
-50
-25
0
25
50
75
100
0
125
0
JUNCTION TEMPERATURE (°C)
Figure 3. Quiescent Current
7
VI – VO = 5V
IO = 5mA
1.01
1
0.99
0.98
-50
-25
0
25
50
75
100
15
20
25
30
35
TJ = 25°C
VO = 5V
IO = 10mA
6.5
6
5.5
5
4.5
4
125
JUNCTION TEMPERATURE (°C)
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
INPUT VOLTAGE (V)
Figure 5. Output Voltage
Figure 6. Quiescent Current
21
10
Figure 4. Peak Output Current
QUIESCENT CURRENT (mA)
NORMALIZED OUTPUT VOLTAGE (V)
1.02
5
INPUT-OUTPUT DIFFERENTIAL (V)
Typical Performance Characteristics
1
Input
Output
CO
2
CI
3
LM78XX
0.1µF
0.33µF
Figure 7. DC Parameters
1
3
LM78XX
Input
Output
2
270pF
RL
VO
2N6121
or EQ
0.33µF
0V
VO
30µS
100Ω
Figure 8. Load Regulation
5.1Ω
1
LM78XX
Input
3
Output
0.33µF
2
RL
470µF
120Hz
+
Figure 9. Ripple Rejection
22
Typical Applications
LM78XX
Input
CI
3
Output
CO
2
1
0.1µF
0.33µF
Figure 10. Fixed Output Regulator
1
Input
CI
3
LM78XX
Output
CO
2
0.33µF
V XX
0.1µF
R1
IQ
IO
RL
V XX
IO =
+
R1 IQ
Notes:
1. To specify an output voltage, substitute voltage value for “XX.” A common ground is required between the input and the
output voltage. The input voltage must remain typically 2.0V above the output voltage even during the low point on the input
ripple voltage.
2. CI is required if regulator is located an appreciable distance from power supply filter.
3. CO improves stability and transient response.
Figure 11.
1
Input
CI
LM78XX
CO
2
0.33µF
Output
3
0.1µF
V XX
R1
IQ
R2
IRI ≥ 5 IQ
VO = VXX(1 + R2 / R1) + IQR2
Figure 12. Circuit for Increasing Output Voltage
23
1
LM7805
Output
3
2
CI
0.33µF
CO
- 2
LM741
+ 3
4
6
10kΩ
0.1µF
IRI ≥ 5 IQ
VO = VXX(1 + R2 / R1) + IQR2
Figure 13. Adjustable Output Regulator (7V to 30V)
Q1 BD536
Input
IQ1
R1
1
3Ω
R1 =
LM78XX
IO
IREG
V BEQ1
Output
3
2
0.1µF
0.33µF
IREG–IQ1 BQ1
IO = IREG + BQ1 (IREG–VBEQ1/R1)
Figure 14. High Current Voltage Regulator
Input
Q1
RSC
Q2
R1
1
LM78XX
3
Output
3Ω
0.33µF
Q1 = TIP42
Q2 = TIP42
RSC =
2
0.1µF
V BEQ2
I SC
Figure 15. High Output Current with Short Circuit Protection
24
Input
3
LM78XX
VI
VO
2
0.33µF
0.1µF
7
COMMON
6
COMMON
2
LM741
4
-VIN
_
4.7kΩ
+
3
4.7kΩ
-VO
TIP42
Figure 16. Tracking Voltage Regulator
1
+20V
LM7815
3
+15V
0.33µF
+
2
0.1µF
1N4001
2.2µF
1µF +
1
2
-20V
1N4001
MC7915
3
-15V
Figure 17. Split Power Supply (±15V – 1A)
25
1
Input
+
0.1µF
2
1
3
LM78XX
Figure 18. Negative Output Voltage Circuit
D45H11
Input
1mH
Output
470Ω
4.7Ω
Z1
1
+
0.33µF
LM78XX
3
2
10µF
+
0.5Ω
2000µF
Figure 19. Switching Regulator
26
Output
LM78XX/LM78XXA — 3-Terminal 1A Positive Voltage Regulator
Mechanical Dimensions
Dimensions in millimeters
TO-220 [ SINGLE GAUGE ]
© 2010 Fairchild Semiconductor Corporation
27
TRADEMARKS
The following includes registered and unregistered trademarks and service marks, owned by Fairchild Semiconductor and/or its global subsidiaries, and is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all such trademarks.
FRFET®
SM
Global Power Resource
Green FPS¥
Green FPS¥ e-Series¥
Gmax¥
GTO¥
IntelliMAX¥
ISOPLANAR¥
MegaBuck¥
MICROCOUPLER¥
MicroFET¥
MicroPak¥
MicroPak2¥
MillerDrive¥
MotionMax¥
Motion-SPM¥
OptoHiT™
OPTOLOGIC®
®
OPTOPLANAR
AccuPower¥
Auto-SPM¥
Build it Now¥
CorePLUS¥
CorePOWER¥
CROSSVOLT¥
CTL¥
Current Transfer Logic¥
DEUXPEED®
Dual Cool™
EcoSPARK®
EfficientMax¥
®
Fairchild®
Fairchild Semiconductor®
FACT Quiet Series¥
FACT®
FAST®
FastvCore¥
FETBench¥
FlashWriter®*
FPS¥
F-PFS¥
®
PDP SPM™
Power-SPM¥
PowerTrench®
PowerXS™
Programmable Active Droop¥
QFET®
QS¥
Quiet Series¥
RapidConfigure¥
¥
Saving our world, 1mW/W/kW at a time™
SignalWise¥
SmartMax¥
SMART START¥
SPM®
STEALTH¥
SuperFET¥
SuperSOT¥-3
SuperSOT¥-6
SuperSOT¥-8
SupreMOS¥
SyncFET¥
Sync-Lock™
®
*
The Power Franchise®
TinyBoost¥
TinyBuck¥
TinyCalc¥
TinyLogic®
TINYOPTO¥
TinyPower¥
TinyPWM¥
TinyWire¥
TriFault Detect¥
TRUECURRENT¥*
PSerDes¥
UHC®
Ultra FRFET¥
UniFET¥
VCX¥
VisualMax¥
XS™
* Trademarks of System General Corporation, used under license by Fairchild Semiconductor.
DISCLAIMER
FAIRCHILD SEMICONDUCTOR RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE CHANGES WITHOUT FURTHER NOTICE TO ANY PRODUCTS HEREIN TO IMPROVE
RELIABILITY, FUNCTION, OR DESIGN. FAIRCHILD DOES NOT ASSUME ANY LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF THE APPLICATION OR USE OF ANY PRODUCT OR
CIRCUIT DESCRIBED HEREIN; NEITHER DOES IT CONVEY ANY LICENSE UNDER ITS PATENT RIGHTS, NOR THE RIGHTS OF OTHERS. THESE
SPECIFICATIONS DO NOT EXPAND THE TERMS OF FAIRCHILD’S WORLDWIDE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, SPECIFICALLY THE WARRANTY THEREIN,
WHICH COVERS THESE PRODUCTS.
LIFE SUPPORT POLICY
FAIRCHILD’S PRODUCTS ARE NOT AUTHORIZED FOR USE AS CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN LIFE SUPPORT DEVICES OR SYSTEMS WITHOUT THE
EXPRESS WRITTEN APPROVAL OF FAIRCHILD SEMICONDUCTOR CORPORATION.
As used herein:
1. Life support devices or systems are devices or systems which, (a) are
intended for surgical implant into the body or (b) support or sustain life,
and (c) whose failure to perform when properly used in accordance
with instructions for use provided in the labeling, can be reasonably
expected to result in a significant injury of the user.
2. A critical component in any component of a life support, device, or
system whose failure to perform can be reasonably expected to
cause the failure of the life support device or system, or to affect its
safety or effectiveness.
ANTI-COUNTERFEITING POLICY
Fairchild Semiconductor Corporation's Anti-Counterfeiting Policy. Fairchild's Anti-Counterfeiting Policy is also stated on our external website, www.fairchildsemi.com,
under Sales Support.
Counterfeiting of semiconductor parts is a growing problem in the industry. All manufacturers of semiconductor products are experiencing counterfeiting of their parts.
Customers who inadvertently purchase counterfeit parts experience many problems such as loss of brand reputation, substandard performance, failed applications,
and increased cost of production and manufacturing delays. Fairchild is taking strong measures to protect ourselves and our customers from the proliferation of
counterfeit parts. Fairchild strongly encourages customers to purchase Fairchild parts either directly from Fairchild or from Authorized Fairchild Distributors who are
listed by country on our web page cited above. Products customers buy either from Fairchild directly or from Authorized Fairchild Distributors are genuine parts, have
full traceability, meet Fairchild's quality standards for handling and storage and provide access to Fairchild's full range of up-to-date technical and product information.
Fairchild and our Authorized Distributors will stand behind all warranties and will appropriately address any warranty issues that may arise. Fairchild will not provide
any warranty coverage or other assistance for parts bought from Unauthorized Sources. Fairchild is committed to combat this global problem and encourage our
customers to do their part in stopping this practice by buying direct or from authorized distributors.
PRODUCT STATUS DEFINITIONS
Definition of Terms
Datasheet Identification
Product Status
Advance Information
Formative / In Design
Preliminary
First Production
No Identification Needed
Full Production
Obsolete
Not In Production
Definition
Datasheet contains the design specifications for product development. Specifications may change in
any manner without notice.
Datasheet contains preliminary data; supplementary data will be published at a later date. Fairchild
Semiconductor reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice to improve design.
Datasheet contains final specifications. Fairchild Semiconductor reserves the right to make changes
at any time without notice to improve the design.
Datasheet contains specifications on a product that is discontinued by Fairchild Semiconductor.
The datasheet is for reference information only.
Rev. I47
© Fairchild Semiconductor Corporation
ANEXO H - Datasheet do diodo 1N4148
DISCRETE SEMICONDUCTORS
DATA SHEET
M3D176
1N4148; 1N4448
High-speed diodes
Product specification
Supersedes data of 1996 Sep 03
1999 May 25
Philips Semiconductors
High-speed diodes
1N4148; 1N4448
FEATURES
DESCRIPTION
• Hermetically sealed leaded glass
SOD27 (DO-35) package
The 1N4148 and 1N4448 are high-speed switching diodes fabricated in planar
technology, and encapsulated in hermetically sealed leaded glass SOD27
(DO-35) packages.
• High switching speed: max. 4 ns
• General application
• Continuous reverse voltage:
max. 75 V
• Repetitive peak reverse voltage:
max. 75 V
handbook, halfpage
k
a
• Repetitive peak forward current:
max. 450 mA.
MAM246
The diodes are type branded.
APPLICATIONS
Fig.1 Simplified outline (SOD27; DO-35) and symbol.
• High-speed switching.
LIMITING VALUES
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 134).
SYMBOL
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
MIN.
MAX.
UNIT
VRRM
repetitive peak reverse voltage
−
75
V
VR
continuous reverse voltage
−
75
V
IF
continuous forward current
−
200
mA
−
450
mA
−
4
A
IFRM
repetitive peak forward current
IFSM
non-repetitive peak forward current
see Fig.2; note 1
square wave; Tj = 25 °C prior to
surge; see Fig.4
t = 1 µs
Ptot
total power dissipation
t = 1 ms
−
1
A
t=1s
−
0.5
A
−
500
mW
Tamb = 25 °C; note 1
Tstg
storage temperature
−65
+200
°C
Tj
junction temperature
−
200
°C
Note
1. Device mounted on an FR4 printed circuit-board; lead length 10 mm.
1999 May 25
2
High-speed diodes
1N4148; 1N4448
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Tj = 25 °C unless otherwise specified.
SYMBOL
VF
IR
IR
PARAMETER
forward voltage
CONDITIONS
MIN.
MAX.
UNIT
see Fig.3
1N4148
IF = 10 mA
−
1
V
1N4448
IF = 5 mA
0.62
0.72
V
IF = 100 mA
−
1
V
reverse current
reverse current; 1N4448
25
nA
VR = 20 V; Tj = 150 °C; see Fig.5
VR = 20 V; see Fig.5
−
50
µA
VR = 20 V; Tj = 100 °C; see Fig.5
−
3
µA
Cd
diode capacitance
f = 1 MHz; VR = 0; see Fig.6
4
pF
trr
reverse recovery time
when switched from IF = 10 mA to
IR = 60 mA; RL = 100 Ω;
measured at IR = 1 mA; see Fig.7
4
ns
Vfr
forward recovery voltage
when switched from IF = 50 mA;
tr = 20 ns; see Fig.8
2.5
V
−
THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS
SYMBOL
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
VALUE
UNIT
Rth j-tp
thermal resistance from junction to tie-point
lead length 10 mm
240
K/W
Rth j-a
thermal resistance from junction to ambient
lead length 10 mm; note 1
350
K/W
Note
1. Device mounted on a printed circuit-board without metallization pad.
1999 May 25
3
High-speed diodes
1N4148; 1N4448
GRAPHICAL DATA
MBG451
300
MBG464
600
handbook, halfpage
handbook, halfpage
IF
(mA)
IF
(mA)
200
400
(1)
0
100
Tamb (oC)
0
200
0
1
2
VF (V)
(1) Tj = 175 °C; typical values.
Device mounted on an FR4 printed-circuit board; lead length 10 mm.
Fig.2
(3)
200
100
0
(2)
(2) Tj = 25 °C; typical values.
(3) Tj = 25 °C; maximum values.
Maximum permissible continuous forward
current as a function of ambient
temperature.
Fig.3
Forward current as a function of forward
voltage.
MBG704
102
handbook, full pagewidth
IFSM
(A)
10
1
10−1
1
10
102
103
tp (µs)
Based on square wave currents.
Tj = 25 °C prior to surge.
Fig.4 Maximum permissible non-repetitive peak forward current as a function of pulse duration.
1999 May 25
4
104
High-speed diodes
1N4148; 1N4448
MGD290
103
handbook, halfpage
MGD004
1.2
handbook, halfpage
IR
(µA)
10
Cd
(pF)
2
1.0
(1)
10
(2)
0.8
1
0.6
10−1
10−2
0
100
Tj (oC)
0.4
200
0
10
VR (V)
20
(1) VR = 75 V; typical values.
(2) VR = 20 V; typical values.
Fig.5
f = 1 MHz; Tj = 25 °C.
Reverse current as a function of junction
temperature.
1999 May 25
Fig.6
5
Diode capacitance as a function of reverse
voltage; typical values.
High-speed diodes
1N4148; 1N4448
tr
tp
t
D.U.T.
10%
IF
RS = 50 Ω
IF
SAMPLING
OSCILLOSCOPE
t rr
t
R = 50 Ω
i
V = VR I F x R S
MGA881
(1)
90%
VR
output signal
input signal
(1) IR = 1 mA.
Fig.7 Reverse recovery voltage test circuit and waveforms.
I
R = 50 Ω
S
1 kΩ
D.U.T.
450 Ω
I
V
90%
OSCILLOSCOPE
V fr
R i = 50 Ω
10%
MGA882
t
tr
input
signal
Fig.8 Forward recovery voltage test circuit and waveforms.
1999 May 25
6
t
tp
output
signal
High-speed diodes
1N4148; 1N4448
PACKAGE OUTLINE
Hermetically sealed glass package; axial leaded; 2 leads
SOD27
(1)
b
D
G1
L
L
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
G1
UNIT
b
max.
D
max.
max.
L
min.
mm
0.56
1.85
4.25
25.4
0
1
2 mm
scale
Note
1. The marking band indicates the cathode.
REFERENCES
OUTLINE
VERSION
IEC
JEDEC
EIAJ
SOD27
A24
DO-35
SC-40
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION
ISSUE DATE
97-06-09
DEFINITIONS
Data Sheet Status
Objective specification
This data sheet contains target or goal specifications for product development.
Preliminary specification
This data sheet contains preliminary data; supplementary data may be published later.
This data sheet contains final product specifications.
Limiting values
Limiting values given are in accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 134). Stress above one or
more of the limiting values may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only and operation
of the device at these or at any other conditions above those given in the Characteristics sections of the specification
is not implied. Exposure to limiting values for extended periods may affect device reliability.
Application information
Where application information is given, it is advisory and does not form part of the specification.
LIFE SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
These products are not designed for use in life support appliances, devices, or systems where malfunction of these
products can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury. Philips customers using or selling these products for
use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Philips for any damages resulting from such
improper use or sale.
1999 May 25
7
Philips Semiconductors – a worldwide company
Argentina: see South America
Australia: 34 Waterloo Road, NORTH RYDE, NSW 2113,
Tel. +61 2 9805 4455, Fax. +61 2 9805 4466
Austria: Computerstr. 6, A-1101 WIEN, P.O. Box 213,
Tel. +43 1 60 101 1248, Fax. +43 1 60 101 1210
Belarus: Hotel Minsk Business Center, Bld. 3, r. 1211, Volodarski Str. 6,
220050 MINSK, Tel. +375 172 20 0733, Fax. +375 172 20 0773
Belgium: see The Netherlands
Brazil: see South America
Bulgaria: Philips Bulgaria Ltd., Energoproject, 15th floor,
51 James Bourchier Blvd., 1407 SOFIA,
Tel. +359 2 68 9211, Fax. +359 2 68 9102
Canada: PHILIPS SEMICONDUCTORS/COMPONENTS,
Tel. +1 800 234 7381, Fax. +1 800 943 0087
China/Hong Kong: 501 Hong Kong Industrial Technology Centre,
72 Tat Chee Avenue, Kowloon Tong, HONG KONG,
Tel. +852 2319 7888, Fax. +852 2319 7700
Colombia: see South America
Czech Republic: see Austria
Denmark: Sydhavnsgade 23, 1780 COPENHAGEN V,
Tel. +45 33 29 3333, Fax. +45 33 29 3905
Finland: Sinikalliontie 3, FIN-02630 ESPOO,
Tel. +358 9 615 800, Fax. +358 9 6158 0920
France: 51 Rue Carnot, BP317, 92156 SURESNES Cedex,
Tel. +33 1 4099 6161, Fax. +33 1 4099 6427
Germany: Hammerbrookstraße 69, D-20097 HAMBURG,
Tel. +49 40 2353 60, Fax. +49 40 2353 6300
Hungary: see Austria
India: Philips INDIA Ltd, Band Box Building, 2nd floor,
254-D, Dr. Annie Besant Road, Worli, MUMBAI 400 025,
Tel. +91 22 493 8541, Fax. +91 22 493 0966
Indonesia: PT Philips Development Corporation, Semiconductors Division,
Gedung Philips, Jl. Buncit Raya Kav.99-100, JAKARTA 12510,
Tel. +62 21 794 0040 ext. 2501, Fax. +62 21 794 0080
Ireland: Newstead, Clonskeagh, DUBLIN 14,
Tel. +353 1 7640 000, Fax. +353 1 7640 200
Israel: RAPAC Electronics, 7 Kehilat Saloniki St, PO Box 18053,
TEL AVIV 61180, Tel. +972 3 645 0444, Fax. +972 3 649 1007
Italy: PHILIPS SEMICONDUCTORS, Piazza IV Novembre 3,
20124 MILANO, Tel. +39 02 67 52 2531, Fax. +39 02 67 52 2557
Japan: Philips Bldg 13-37, Kohnan 2-chome, Minato-ku,
TOKYO 108-8507, Tel. +81 3 3740 5130, Fax. +81 3 3740 5057
Korea: Philips House, 260-199 Itaewon-dong, Yongsan-ku, SEOUL,
Tel. +82 2 709 1412, Fax. +82 2 709 1415
Malaysia: No. 76 Jalan Universiti, 46200 PETALING JAYA, SELANGOR,
Tel. +60 3 750 5214, Fax. +60 3 757 4880
Mexico: 5900 Gateway East, Suite 200, EL PASO, TEXAS 79905,
Tel. +9-5 800 234 7381, Fax +9-5 800 943 0087
Middle East: see Italy
Netherlands: Postbus 90050, 5600 PB EINDHOVEN, Bldg. VB,
Tel. +31 40 27 82785, Fax. +31 40 27 88399
New Zealand: 2 Wagener Place, C.P.O. Box 1041, AUCKLAND,
Tel. +64 9 849 4160, Fax. +64 9 849 7811
Norway: Box 1, Manglerud 0612, OSLO,
Tel. +47 22 74 8000, Fax. +47 22 74 8341
Pakistan: see Singapore
Philippines: Philips Semiconductors Philippines Inc.,
106 Valero St. Salcedo Village, P.O. Box 2108 MCC, MAKATI,
Metro MANILA, Tel. +63 2 816 6380, Fax. +63 2 817 3474
Poland: Ul. Lukiska 10, PL 04-123 WARSZAWA,
Tel. +48 22 612 2831, Fax. +48 22 612 2327
Portugal: see Spain
Romania: see Italy
Russia: Philips Russia, Ul. Usatcheva 35A, 119048 MOSCOW,
Tel. +7 095 755 6918, Fax. +7 095 755 6919
Singapore: Lorong 1, Toa Payoh, SINGAPORE 319762,
Tel. +65 350 2538, Fax. +65 251 6500
Slovakia: see Austria
Slovenia: see Italy
South Africa: S.A. PHILIPS Pty Ltd., 195-215 Main Road Martindale,
2092 JOHANNESBURG, P.O. Box 58088 Newville 2114,
Tel. +27 11 471 5401, Fax. +27 11 471 5398
South America: Al. Vicente Pinzon, 173, 6th floor,
04547-130 SÃO PAULO, SP, Brazil,
Tel. +55 11 821 2333, Fax. +55 11 821 2382
Spain: Balmes 22, 08007 BARCELONA,
Tel. +34 93 301 6312, Fax. +34 93 301 4107
Sweden: Kottbygatan 7, Akalla, S-16485 STOCKHOLM,
Tel. +46 8 5985 2000, Fax. +46 8 5985 2745
Switzerland: Allmendstrasse 140, CH-8027 ZÜRICH,
Tel. +41 1 488 2741 Fax. +41 1 488 3263
Taiwan: Philips Semiconductors, 6F, No. 96, Chien Kuo N. Rd., Sec. 1,
TAIPEI, Taiwan Tel. +886 2 2134 2886, Fax. +886 2 2134 2874
Thailand: PHILIPS ELECTRONICS (THAILAND) Ltd.,
209/2 Sanpavuth-Bangna Road Prakanong, BANGKOK 10260,
Tel. +66 2 745 4090, Fax. +66 2 398 0793
Turkey: Yukari Dudullu, Org. San. Blg., 2.Cad. Nr. 28 81260 Umraniye,
ISTANBUL, Tel. +90 216 522 1500, Fax. +90 216 522 1813
Ukraine: PHILIPS UKRAINE, 4 Patrice Lumumba str., Building B, Floor 7,
252042 KIEV, Tel. +380 44 264 2776, Fax. +380 44 268 0461
United Kingdom: Philips Semiconductors Ltd., 276 Bath Road, Hayes,
MIDDLESEX UB3 5BX, Tel. +44 181 730 5000, Fax. +44 181 754 8421
United States: 811 East Arques Avenue, SUNNYVALE, CA 94088-3409,
Tel. +1 800 234 7381, Fax. +1 800 943 0087
Uruguay: see South America
Vietnam: see Singapore
Yugoslavia: PHILIPS, Trg N. Pasica 5/v, 11000 BEOGRAD,
Tel. +381 11 62 5344, Fax.+381 11 63 5777
For all other countries apply to: Philips Semiconductors,
International Marketing & Sales Communications, Building BE-p, P.O. Box 218,
5600 MD EINDHOVEN, The Netherlands, Fax. +31 40 27 24825
Internet: http://www.semiconductors.philips.com
© Philips Electronics N.V. 1999
SCA 65
All rights are reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the prior written consent of the copyright owner.
The information presented in this document does not form part of any quotation or contract, is believed to be accurate and reliable and may be changed
without notice. No liability will be accepted by the publisher for any consequence of its use. Publication thereof does not convey nor imply any license
under patent- or other industrial or intellectual property rights.
Printed in The Netherlands
115002/03/pp8
Date of release: 1999 May 25
Document order number:
9397 750 05892
ANEXO I - Datasheet do diodo 1N4007
DISCRETE SEMICONDUCTORS
DATA SHEET
handbook, halfpage
M3D119
1N4001ID to 1N4007ID
Rectifiers
Supersedes data of April 1992
File under Discrete Semiconductors, SC01
1996 Jun 10
Rectifiers
FEATURES
DESCRIPTION
• Glass passivated
Cavity free cylindrical glass package
through Implotec(1) technology.
• High maximum operating
temperature
• Low leakage current
This package is hermetically sealed
and fatigue free as coefficients of
expansion of all used parts are
matched.
(1) Implotec is a trademark of Philips.
• Excellent stability
• Available in ammo-pack.
k
handbook, 4 columns
a
MAM123
Fig.1 Simplified outline (SOD81) and symbol.
LIMITING VALUES
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 134).
SYMBOL
VRRM
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
−
50
UNIT
V
1N4002ID
−
100
V
1N4003ID
−
200
V
1N4004ID
−
400
V
1N4005ID
−
600
V
1N4006ID
−
800
V
1N4007ID
−
1000
V
−
50
V
continuous reverse voltage
1N4001ID
1N4002ID
−
100
V
1N4003ID
−
200
V
1N4004ID
−
400
V
1N4005ID
−
600
V
1N4006ID
−
800
V
−
1000
V
1N4007ID
IF(AV)
MAX.
repetitive peak reverse voltage
1N4001ID
VR
MIN.
average forward current
averaged over any 20 ms
period; Tamb = 75 °C; see Fig.2
−
1.00 A
averaged over any 20 ms
period; Tamb = 100 °C; see Fig.2
−
0.75 A
−
10
A
half sinewave; 60 Hz
−
20
A
IFRM
repetitive peak forward current
IFSM
non-repetitive peak forward current
Tstg
storage temperature
−65
+175
°C
Tj
junction temperature
−65
+175
°C
1996 Jun 10
2
Rectifiers
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Tj = 25 °C; unless otherwise specified.
SYMBOL
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
MAX.
UNIT
VF
forward voltage
IF = 1 A; see see Fig.3
1.1
V
VF(AV)
full-cycle average forward voltage
IF(AV) = 1 A
0.8
V
IR
reverse current
VR = VRmax
VR = VRmax; Tamb = 100 °C
50
µA
IR(AV)
full-cycle average reverse current
VR = VRRMmax; Tamb = 75 °C
30
µA
10
µA
THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS
SYMBOL
PARAMETER
CONDITIONS
Rth j-tp
thermal resistance from junction to tie-point
lead length = 10 mm
Rth j-a
thermal resistance from junction to ambient
note 1
VALUE
60
K/W
120
K/W
Note
1. Device mounted on epoxy-glass printed-circuit board, 1.5 mm thick; thickness of copper ≥40 µm, see Fig.4.
For more information please refer to the “General Part of Handbook SC01”.
1996 Jun 10
3
UNIT
Rectifiers
GRAPHICAL DATA
MBH386
1.5
MBH385
10
handbook, halfpage
handbook, halfpage
IF
(A)
IF
(A)
1
1
0.5
(1)
0
10−1
0
100
Tamb (°C)
200
0
0.5
(2)
(3)
1
VF (V)
1.5
(1) Tamb = 100 °C.
(2) Tamb = 20 °C.
(3) Tamb = −50 °C.
Fig.2
Maximum forward current as a function of
ambient temperature.
Fig.3
50
handbook, halfpage
25
7
50
2
3
MGA200
Dimensions in mm.
Fig.4 Device mounted on a printed-circuit board.
1996 Jun 10
4
Forward current as a function of forward
voltage; typical values.
Rectifiers
PACKAGE OUTLINE
5 max
0.81
max
2.15
max
28 min
3.8 max
28 min
MBC051
Dimensions in mm.
Fig.5 SOD81.
DEFINITIONS
Data sheet status
Objective specification
This data sheet contains target or goal specifications for product development.
Preliminary specification
This data sheet contains preliminary data; supplementary data may be published later.
This data sheet contains final product specifications.
Limiting values
Limiting values given are in accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 134). Stress above one or
more of the limiting values may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only and operation
of the device at these or at any other conditions above those given in the Characteristics sections of the specification
is not implied. Exposure to limiting values for extended periods may affect device reliability.
Application information
Where application information is given, it is advisory and does not form part of the specification.
LIFE SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
These products are not designed for use in life support appliances, devices, or systems where malfunction of these
products can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury. Philips customers using or selling these products for
use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Philips for any damages resulting from such
improper use or sale.
1996 Jun 10
5
ANEXO J - Especificações das polias e correias XL

HD44780U - SENAI

Transcrição

Documentos relacionados

É tempo de analisar e fazer uma completa reflexão sobre a vida

Juramento de Maimônides

Questions 1-4 refer to Reading A Reader`s Digest, Sept. 2006

Clique aqui para ler

Confira a mensagem de Dino Cunha à Andamiro, com

newsletter - St. Nicholas School

Newsletter - St. Nicholas School

Acesse o poema Lady Lazarus.

CALENDÁRIO DA SEMANA

Operação M44 Operation M44

HCPL-3120

Applications of Electromagnetic Induction Science Mathematics

Best Online Drugstore - Onde Comprar Cialis Em Curitiba